Handleiding Renault Espace - 2015 (pagina 9 van 316) (Engels)

617129

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/316

Pagina verder

ESPACE

DRIVER’S HANDBOOK

A passion

for

performance

ELF, partner of

RENAULT recommends ELF

Partners in cutting-edge automotive technology, Elf and Renault combine their expertise on both

the racetrack and the city streets. This enduring partnership gives drivers a range of lubricants

perfectly suited to Renault cars. Lasting protection and optimum performance for your engine –

guaranteed. Whether changing the oil or simply topping up, to find the approved ELF lubricant

best suited to your vehicle, ask your Renault dealer for a recommendation or consult your vehi-

cle maintenance handbook.

www.lubricants.elf.com

A brand from

0.1

Translated from French. Copying or translation, in part or in full, is forbidden unless prior written permission has been obtained from the vehicle manu-

facturer.

This Driver’s Handbook contains the information necessary:

– for you to familiarise yourself with your vehicle, to use it to its best advantage and to benefit fully from the all the functions and

the technical developments it incorporates.

– to ensure that it always gives the best performance by following the simple, but comprehensive advice concerning regular main-

tenance.

– to enable you to deal quickly with minor faults not requiring specialist attention.

It is well worth taking a few minutes to read this handbook to familiarise yourself with the information and guidelines it contains

about the vehicle and its functions and new features. If certain points are still unclear, our Network technicians will be only too

pleased to provide you with any additional information.

The following symbol will help you when reading this handbook:

Welcome to your new vehicle

The descriptions of the models given in this handbook are based on the technical specifications at the time of writing. This hand-

book covers all items of equipment (both standard and optional) available for these models but whether or not these are

fitted to the vehicle depends on the version, options selected and the country where the vehicle is sold.

This handbook may also contain information about items of equipment to be introduced later in the model year.

Throughout the manual, the “approved Dealer” is your RENAULT Dealer.

To indicate a hazard, danger or safety recommendation.

Enjoy driving your new vehicle.

0.2

0.3

Getting to know your vehicle ...............................

Driving ...................................................................

Your comfort .........................................................

Maintenance .........................................................

Practical advice ....................................................

Technical specifications ......................................

Alphabetical index ...............................................

Sections

CONTENTS

0.4

1.1

Section 1: Getting to know your vehicle

The RENAULT card: general information and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2

Locking/unlocking the doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8

Opening and closing the doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11

Automatic locking when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14

Automatic tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15

Headrests - Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20

Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28

Additional methods of restraint: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32

in addition to the front seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32

to the rear seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.36

side protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37

Child safety: General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.39

choosing a child seat mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.42

Fitting a child seat, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.45

Child seats: attachment by seat belt or by Isofix system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.47

deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.59

Driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.62

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.64

trip computer and warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.74

vehicle settings customisation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.84

Clock and outdoor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.85

Steering wheel/Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.86

Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.87

Audible and visual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.90

Exterior lighting and signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.91

Windscreen wash/wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.96

Rear windscreen wash, wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.102

Fuel tank (filling with fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.104

1.2

RENAULT CARD: general information (1/2)

The RENAULT card is used

for:

– locking/unlocking the doors and tail-

gate (doors, tailgate) and the fuel

filler flap (see the following pages);

– switching on the vehicle lighting re-

motely (refer to the following pages);

– Automatic closing of electric win-

dows and, depending on the vehi-

cle, of the sunroof; please see the in-

formation on “Electric windows” and

“Electric sunroof” in Chapter 3;

– starting the engine; please see the

information on “Starting, stopping

the engine” in Chapter 2.

Battery life

Make sure that the correct battery type

is being used, and that the battery is in

good condition and inserted correctly.

Its service life is approximately two

years: replace it when the message

“Keycard battery low” appears on the

instrument panel (refer to the informa-

tion on the “RENAULT card: battery” in

section 5).

RENAULT card operating

range

This varies according to the surround-

ings. It is important to make sure when

handling the RENAULT card that you

do not lock or unlock the doors by inad-

vertently pressing the buttons.

When the battery is flat, you can

still lock/unlock and start your vehi-

cle. Please see the information on

“Locking and unlocking the doors”

in Chapter 1 and “Starting, stopping

the engine” in Chapter 2.

1 Unlocking the doors and tailgate.

2 Locking all doors and tailgate.

3 Locking/unlocking of the boot and,

depending on the vehicle, auto-

matic opening/closing of the tail-

gate (please see the information on

“Automatic tailgate” in Section 1).

4 Switching on the lighting remotely.

1.3

RENAULT CARD: general information (2/2)

Advice

Avoid leaving the card in hot, cold or

humid areas.

Do not keep the RENAULT card in

a place where it could be bent or

damaged accidentally, such as in a

back pocket of a garment.

Replacement: need for an

additional RENAULT Card

If you lose your RENAULT card or

require another, you can obtain one

from an approved dealer.

If a RENAULT card is replaced, it

will be necessary to take the vehi-

cle and all of its RENAULT cards

to an approved dealer to initialise

the system.

You may use up to four RENAULT

cards per vehicle.

Distance lighting function

Pressing button 4 switches on the

dipped beam headlights, the indicator

lights and the interior lighting for ap-

proximately 30 seconds. This can be

used, for example, to identify the vehi-

cle from a distance when parked in a

car park.

Note: Pressing button 4 again switches

off the lighting.

Driver’s responsibility

Never leave an animal,

child or adult who is not

self-sufficient alone in your

vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the

electric windows or locking the

doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,

please remember that the tempera-

ture inside the passenger compart-

ment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS

INJURY.

1.4

RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (1/4)

Do not store the RENAULT card

anywhere it may come into con-

tact with other electronic equipment

(computer, phone, etc.) as this could

hinder its operation.

Driver’s responsibility

Never leave an animal,

child or adult who is not

self-sufficient alone in your

vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the

electric windows or locking the

doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,

please remember that the tempera-

ture inside the passenger compart-

ment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS

INJURY.

There are two ways to unlock/lock the

vehicle:

– the RENAULT card in “Hands-free”

mode;

– the RENAULT card in remote con-

trol mode.

Using the card in “hands-

free” mode

In “hands-free” mode, it is possible to

lock/unlock the vehicle without using

any of the RENAULT card’s buttons,

as long as the card is within the access

zone 1.

Note: It is possible to disable “hands-

free” access using the multifunction

screen (please see the equipment in-

structions).

1.5

RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (2/4)

“Hands-free” locking using the

sensor 3

If you wish to lock your vehicle while the

card is within range, make sure that the

doors and boot are closed and place

your finger over the sensor 3 on the

driver’s door handle. The vehicle will

lock.

Note: The sensor cannot be used to

lock the vehicle unless the RENAULT

card is within the access zone 1.

Special features of the locking

system

Having locked the vehicle by pressing

the sensor 3, there is a delay of approx-

imately 3 seconds before it can be un-

locked again. During these 3 seconds,

the door handles can be tried to make

sure that the vehicle is locked properly.

If a door is open or not properly closed:

– when locking using the sensor 3,

the vehicle will lock/unlock in quick

succession, but the hazard warning

lights will not flash;

– the vehicle will not lock as you move

away.

Remote “Hands-free” locking

With the RENAULT card on you, and

doors and boot closed, move away

from the vehicle: it will lock automati-

cally as soon as you leave the access

zone.

Note: The distance at which the vehicle

locks depends on the surroundings.

To indicate that the doors have been

locked, the hazard warning lights

flash once and then light up for ap-

proximately four seconds, and a beep

sounds in confirmation.

“Hands-free” unlocking

With the RENAULT card in zone 1,

place your hand on a door handle 2: the

vehicle will unlock.

The hazard warning lights flash once

to indicate that the doors have been un-

locked.

Pressing button 4 unlocks the whole

vehicle, including the boot, or, for ve-

hicles equipped with an automatic tail-

gate, opens the boot completely.

1.6

RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (3/4)

Particular features of the locking

system (continued)

If the RENAULT card has been within

range for approximately 15 minutes,

remote locking is disabled.

The vehicle cannot be locked if the card

is within the zone 7.

If the vehicle is unlocked by pressing

the button on the RENAULT card, but

the doors or boot are not then opened;

remote “hands-free” locking is disabled.

Using the card as a remote

control

Unlocking with the card RENAULT

Press the button 5.

The hazard warning lights flash once

to indicate that the doors have been un-

locked.

Locking using the RENAULT card

With the doors and boot closed, press

button 6: the vehicle will lock.

The hazard warning lights will flash

twice to indicate that the vehicle is

locked.

Note: The maximum distance at which

the vehicle locks depends on the sur-

roundings.

Special features

If the a door or the boot is open or not

properly closed, the vehicle cannot be

locked. The vehicle will lock/unlock in

quick succession, but the hazard warn-

ing lights will not flash.

The card buttons are deactivated

when the engine is running.

1.7

Locking/unlocking only the

boot

With vehicles not equipped with an au-

tomatic tailgate, press the button 8 to

lock/unlock the boot only.

If, while the engine is running, a door

is opened and closed, and the card is

no longer in the zone 7, the message

Keycard not detected indicates that the

card is not inside the vehicle. This will,

for example, prevent you from driving

away after dropping off a passenger

who has kept the card on them.

The warning disappears when the card

is detected again.

RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (4/4)

Driver’s responsibility

Never leave an animal,

child or adult who is not

self-sufficient alone in your

vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the

electric windows or locking the

doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,

please remember that the tempera-

ture inside the passenger compart-

ment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS

INJURY.

1.8

LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (1/3)

If the RENAULT card does

not work:

In certain cases, the RENAULT card

may not work:

– when the RENAULT card battery is

drained, flat battery, etc.

– use of appliances operating on the

same frequency as the card (mobile

phone, etc.);

– vehicle located in a high electromag-

netic radiation zone.

It is then possible:

– to use the key that is built into the

card;

– to lock each of the doors manually;

– to use the interior door locking/un-

locking control (refer to the following

pages).

The card’s built-in key

The built-in key 2 is used to lock or

unlock the front left-hand door if the

RENAULT card is not working.

Access with key 2

Slide the rear casing 1 downwards

while pressing on zone A.

1.9

LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (2/3)

Locking the doors manually

Turn screw 4 with the door open (using

the end of the key) and close the door.

This means that the doors are then

locked from the outside.

The doors may then only be opened

from the inside or by using the key in

the front left-hand door.

Using the key integrated in the

RENAULT card

– Insert the tip of the key 2 into the

notch 3 at the bottom of the cover A

on the front left-hand door;

– Move it upwards to remove the

cover B;

– Insert the key 2 into the lock and lock

or unlock the front left-hand door.

Once you are inside the vehicle, put the

key back in its casing in the RENAULT

card.

1.10

LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (3/3)

Interior locking/unlocking

door control

Switch 5 controls the doors, the boot

and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.

If a door or the tailgate is open or not

closed properly, the doors and tailgate

lock/unlock quickly.

If you need to carry a load with the

boot open, you can still lock everything

else: with the engine stopped, press

switch 5 for more than five seconds to

lock the other opening elements.

Locking the doors without

the RENAULT card

For example, in the event of a dis-

charged battery or the RENAULT card

temporarily not working, etc.

With the engine switched off and

an opening element (door or boot)

open, press and hold switch 5 for more

than five seconds.

When the door is closed, all the doors

and tailgate will be locked.

Unlocking the vehicle from the outside

is only possible with the RENAULT card

in the vehicle's access zone or using

the key integrated in the RENAULT

card.

Door and tailgate status

indicator

With the RENAULT card inside the

passenger compartment, press the

button START. The light built into the

switch 5 will indicate whether the open-

ing elements are locked or not.

– indicator light on, the doors and tail-

gate are locked;

– indicator light off, the doors and tail-

gate are unlocked.

When you lock the doors from the out-

side, the indicator light remains lit for a

moment, and then goes out.

Never leave your vehicle

with the RENAULT card

inside.

Driver’s responsibility

If you decide to keep the

doors locked when you are

driving, remember that it

may be more difficult for those as-

sisting you to gain access to the

passenger compartment in the

event of an emergency.

1.11

OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (1/3)

Opening the doors from the

outside

With the doors unlocked or RENAULT

card on you, hold handle 1 and pull it

towards you.

Opening from the inside

Pull on the handle 2.

As a safety precaution,

the doors should only be

opened or closed when the

vehicle is stationary.

Lights-on reminder buzzer

If you have switched off the ignition

and left the lights switched on, a remin-

der buzzer will sound when a door is

opened while the light stalk is not in po-

sition AUTO.

1.12

OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (2/3)

Door/tailgate open buzzer

At a standstill, warning light 3 lights

up on the instrument panel alongside

warning light 4, indicating the opening

element(s) (door, boot) open or incor-

rectly closed.

Once the vehicle reaches a speed of

approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), a war-

ning light indicates if the door(s) or lug-

gage compartment are open or impro-

perly closed, along with the message

«Boot open» or «Door open» and a

beep will sound for around 40 seconds

or until the door/luggage compartment

is closed.

1.13

OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (3/3)

Child safety

Press switch 5 to allow or prevent ope-

ning of the rear doors and rear electric

windows from inside the vehicle.

The indicator light in the switch lights up

to confirm that the locks have been ac-

tivated.

Note: If there is a system fault, the mes-

sage “Check child safety device” is dis-

played on the instrument panel: please

contact an authorised dealer.

Safety of rear occupants

The driver can enable op-

eration of the rear doors

and, depending on the ve-

hicle, the electric windows by press-

ing switch 4 on the side with the il-

lustration.

Depending on the vehicle, in the

event of a fault:

– a beep sounds;

– a message is displayed on the

instrument panel;

– the integrated indicator does not

light up.

If the battery has been discon-

nected, press switch 4 on the side

with the symbol to lock the rear

doors.

Driver’s responsibility

when parking or stopping

the vehicle

Never leave an animal,

child or adult who is not self-suffi-

cient alone on your vehicle, even for

a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the

electric windows or locking the

doors.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,

please remember that the tempera-

ture inside the passenger compart-

ment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS

INJURY.

As a safety precaution,

the doors should only be

opened or closed when the

vehicle is stationary.

1.14

AUTOMATIC LOCKING WHEN DRIVING

Operating principle

After the vehicle is started, the system

automatically locks the doors when you

are driving at approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h) and over.

The door can be unlocked:

– by pressing central door unlocking

switch 2.

– at a standstill, by opening a front

door from inside the vehicle.

Note: if a door is opened or closed, it

will automatically lock again when the

vehicle reaches a speed of 6 mph

(10 km/h).

Activating/deactivating the

function

To switch it on: with the vehicle at a

standstill and the engine running, press

switch 2 until a beep sounds.

To deactivate: with the vehicle at a

standstill and the engine running, press

switch 2 until two beeps sound.

You can also deactivate/activate the

function from the menu on the multi-

function screen 1 (refer to the informa-

tion on the “Vehicle settings customisa-

tion menu” section 1, “Auto door locking

while driving” function).

Operating faults

If you experience an operating fault (no

automatic locking, the indicator light in-

corporated in switch 2 does not light up

when trying to lock the doors and boot,

etc.), make sure that locking has not

been deactivated by mistake and check

that the doors and boot are properly

closed. If they are correctly locked and

the fault is still present, contact an au-

thorised dealer.

Driver’s responsibility

If you decide to keep the

doors locked when you are

driving, remember that it

may be more difficult for those as-

sisting you to gain access to the

passenger compartment in the

event of an emergency.

1.15

If fitted on the vehicle, the tailgate locks

and unlocks at the same time as the

doors.

There are four modes to manoeuvre

the tailgate:

– using the RENAULT card remote

control;

– using the controls on the tailgate;

– using the dashboard control;

– using the hands-free function.

AUTOMATIC TAILGATE (1/5)

Conditions of use

– Immobilise the vehicle.

– If there is any ice or snow prevent-

ing the tailgate from opening, this ice

or snow must be removed to free the

tailgate.

– In the event that the battery is dis-

charged or if it is changed, the tail-

gate should be closed (manually

if necessary) to restart the tailgate

motor.

Ensure that nobody is close

to the moving parts when

opening/closing the tail-

gate.

Risk of injury.

Opening/Closing

Activating the automatic tailgate open-

ing or closing using the dashboard

control or using the card, three beeps

sound just before the tailgate begins to

move.

When opening or closing the tail-

gate, ensure that nothing interferes

with the manoeuvre.

To avoid damaging the tailgate

system, do not manually force the

tailgate to open or close while it is

moving.

1.16

AUTOMATIC TAILGATE (2/5)

Using the tailgate interior closing

control

Press control 3.

Using the tailgate exterior opening

control

Press control 2.

Using the Renault card remote

control

With the ignition off, press and hold

switch 1 on the RENAULT card.

As a safety precaution,

the doors should only be

opened or closed when the

vehicle is stationary.

Risk of injury.

1.17

Do not keep your foot in the air. Carry

out the movement without stopping.

Note: With the tailgate open, after de-

tecting a closure control, it waits around

3 seconds before triggering the closure

(a beep is emitted every second).

Using the dashboard control

Press and hold switch 4.

Using the hands-free function

The hands-free function grants access

to the boot or allows it to be closed

while you have your hands full.

With the RENAULT card on your person

and with the ignition off, perform a for-

wards/backwards movement with your

foot in the area delimited by the sen-

sors 5.

The sensor detects the approach and

removal of your foot and triggers the

opening or closing of the tailgate.

AUTOMATIC TAILGATE (3/5)

Activation/deactivation of the

hands-free function

Using the multifunction screen, select

menu “Vehicle”, “User settings” then

“Use handsfree card: open/close”.

Select “ON” or “OFF” to activate or de-

activate the function.

Usage features of the hands-free

function

– the hands-free function is no longer

available after a few days of lack of

movement of the vehicle, or after

around 15 minutes if the vehicle is

unlocked. To reactivate it, use the

unlocking button on the RENAULT

card.

– The “Hands-free” function is only

available if the vehicle is stationary

and the engine is switched off (and

not on standby with the Stop and

Start function).

– The hands-free feature may not

work if the vehicle is equipped with

a towbar or is in an area with high

electromagnetic radiation.

Deactivate the “Hands-free” func-

tion when you wash your vehicle by

hand. Risk of unwanted opening of

the tailgate.

1.18

AUTOMATIC TAILGATE (4/5)

Stopping the tailgate

manoeuvre

The automatic tailgate manoeuvre can

be stopped at any time by a short press

on one of the controls.

If the tailgate is stationary in the inter-

mediate position, your next press will

move the tailgate in the opposite direc-

tion to when you stopped it.

Manual mode

After stopping the tailgate, you can per-

form the manoeuvre manually if you

wish.

You can switch to automatic movement

at any time by pressing one of the con-

trols.

Automatic reversal of the

tailgate manoeuvre

If the tailgate encounters an obstacle

(presence of an object or a person)

during its manoeuvre, it will stop and

reverse its direction by a few degrees

in order to release the obstacle.

Press the tailgate opening/closing con-

trol to reperform the tailgate movement

in the same direction as before encoun-

tering the obstacle.

The automatic reverse

function is a system aid and

should under no circum-

stances be taken to replace

the driver’s care or responsibility

whilst closing the tailgate.

Limiting the tailgate opening

angle

You can adjust the maximum tailgate

opening height It will always stop at the

chosen position:

– open the tailgate to an intermediate

position;

– manually adjust the tailgate to the

chosen position;

– press the automatic tailgate control 3

for more than 3 seconds to save the

position.

Two beeps will sound to notify you

that the position has been saved.

1.19

AUTOMATIC TAILGATE (5/5)

Operating faults

If you activate the automatic tailgate

continuously for around a minute (se-

quence of opening and closing), it will

stop in order to avoid overheating. The

operation will return to normal after

about a minute.

The automatic tailgate will not operate

if the battery is on low charge. In this

case, operate the automatic tailgate

with the engine started.

In very cold weather conditions, the au-

tomatic opening or closing may not op-

erate if the tailgate joints are frozen.

Precautions during use

Before opening/closing the tailgate,

ensure that the surrounding space is

sufficient to allow the tailgate to oper-

ate. If not, stop the tailgate movement

before contact.

The installation of accessories such as

a bicycle carrier on the tailgate will lead

to more weight on the tailgate. The tail-

gate may operate slowly or not open

fully.

If the tailgate is moving and the engine

is started, the movement will stop for a

seconds before continuing.

Avoid multiple manual stops during the

automatic tailgate movement (risk of

damaging the tailgate system).

Driver’s responsibility

Never leave an animal,

child or adult who is not

self-sufficient alone in your

vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the

electric windows or locking the

doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,

please remember that the tempera-

ture inside the passenger compart-

ment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS

INJURY.

1.20

To raise the headrest

Pull the headrest upwards to the de-

sired height.

To lower the headrest

Press button 2 and guide the headrest

down to the desired height.

To adjust the angle of the

headrest

Depending on the vehicle, move sec-

tion A towards or away from you to the

required position.

To adjust side supports B

Depending on the vehicle, sections B

can be adjusted independently to the

desired position.

To remove the headrest

Raise it to its highest position (tilt the

seatback backwards if necessary).

Press button 2 and lift the headrest to

release it.

To refit the headrest

Check that the headrest rods are

clean 3.

Insert the headrest rods into the holes 1

(tilt the seatback backwards if neces-

sary).

Lower the headrest until it locks, press

button 2 and lower the headrest as far

as it will go.

Check that the headrest is properly

locked in place.

FRONT HEADRESTS

The headrest is an impor-

tant safety component:

ensure that it is in place and

in the correct position. The

distance between your head and the

headrest and the distance between

the head and section A should be

as small as possible.

1.21

FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (1/2)

To move the seat forwards or

back

Lift handle 1 to release. Release the

handle at the desired position and

make sure that it is locked.

To raise or lower the seat

base

Move lever 2 as many times as neces-

sary upwards or downwards.

To tilt the seatback

Lift handle 3 and tilt the seatback to the

desired position. Release the handle at

the desired position and make sure that

it is locked.

To adjust the seat’s lumbar

position

Lower handle 4 to increase the support

and lift it to decrease it.

1.22

Heated seats

With the ignition on:

– Pressing the switch 5 on the requi-

red seat for the first time activates

the heating system on high. Both in-

tegrated switch warning lights come

on;

– pressing the switch for the second

time changes the heating to low. One

integrated warning light comes on;

– pressing for the third time turns the

heating off.

FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (2/2)

For safety reasons, make

these adjustments only

when the vehicle is statio-

nary.

We would advise you not to recline

the seatbacks too far to ensure that

the effectiveness of the seat belts is

not reduced.

Nothing should be placed on the

floor (area in front of driver) as such

objects may slide under the pedal

during braking manoeuvres, thus

obstructing its use.

Operating faults

When an operating fault is detected,

the integrated warning lights on the

switch 5 for the seat concerned flash.

Consult an approved dealer.

1.23

DRIVER’S SEAT WITH ELECTRIC CONTROLS (1/2)

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is not being

driven.

Make sure that the seatbacks are

correctly locked in place.

We would advise you not to recline

the seatbacks too far to ensure that

the effectiveness of the seat belts is

not reduced.

No object should be placed on the

floor (in front of the driver). such

objects may slide under the pedals

during sudden braking manoeuvres

and obstruct their use.

On equipped vehicles, switch 1 grants

access to the seats menu on the multi-

function screen (please refer to the fol-

lowing pages).

Make sure that the seat-

backs are correctly locked

in place.

Adjusting the seatback

To tilt the seatback, move the top of

switch 2 forwards or backwards.

Adjusting the lumbar support

on the driver’s seat

Move the switch 3 forwards, back-

wards, up or down.

1.24

DRIVER’S SEAT WITH ELECTRIC CONTROLS (2/2)

Heated seats

With the ignition on:

– Pressing the switch 6 on the requi-

red seat for the first time activates

the heating system on high. Both in-

tegrated switch warning lights come

on;

– pressing the switch for the second

time changes the heating to low. One

integrated warning light comes on;

– pressing for the third time turns the

heating off.

Adjusting the seat position

To move the seat forwards or back

Move switch 4 forwards or backwards.

To raise or lower the seat base

Move the back of switch 4 up or down.

To tilt the seat base

(depending on the vehicle)

Move the front of switch 4 upwards or

downwards.

Adjusting the seat length

Lift handle 5 to unlock. Release the

handle at the desired position and

make sure that it is locked.

1.25

FRONT SEATS: Functions (1/3)

Massage

You can activate the driver and front

passenger seat massage function.

Using the multifunction screen,

select menu “Vehicle”, “Seats” then

“Massage”.

Browse menu “Driver” or “Passenger”

to:

– select the type of massage (Tonic,

Relaxing or Lumbar);

– adjust the intensity (+ or -);

– adjust the speed (+ or -);

– reset the selected settings. Press 2

then “Reset”;

– activate/deactivate the massage

seat (ON or OFF).

Note: the mode selected in the “Multi-

Sense” menu may affect the massage

configuration (please refer to the infor-

mation in “Multi-Sense” in Section 3).

Using the multifunction screen, de-

pending on the vehicle you can access

a number of seat functions.

On equipped vehicles, switch 1 grants

direct access to the seat menu on the

multifunction screen.

Please refer to the multimedia equip-

ment instructions for further informa-

tion.

Massage

PassengerDriver

Massage

Tonic Relaxing

Lumbar

Intensity

Speed

1.26

FRONT SEATS: Functions (2/3)

Settings

Using the multifunction screen, select

menu “Vehicle”, “Seats” then “Settings”.

You can activate or deactivate the fol-

lowing elements:

– easy driver access;

– easy passenger access;

– Courtesy for passenger;

– visual feedback of current move-

ment.

Easy driver and passenger access

Press “ON” or “OFF” to activate or de-

activate this function.

When this function is activated, the

seat automatically moves back when

the driver or passenger leaves the vehi-

cle, and returns to its position when the

start button is pressed.

Courtesy for passenger

Press “ON” or “OFF” to activate or de-

activate this function.

When this function is activated, the

driver can adjust the passenger seat

using switches 3, 4 and 5.

Easy access driver

Easy access passenger

Courtesy for passenger

Position

OFF

1.27

FRONT SEATS: Functions (3/3)

Position

It is possible to store the driving posi-

tion of the driver seat.

The driving position includes the set-

tings for the seat base and seatback as

well as the door mirrors.

The driving position can be stored and

recalled by pressing the buttons:

– RENAULT hands-free card detected;

– when the driver’s door is opened.

Recalling the driving position

With the vehicle at a standstill, using

the multifunction screen, select menu

“Vehicle”, “Seats”, “Settings” then

“Position”, select “Recall” and confirm.

Note: recall of the saved driving po-

sition is interrupted if one of the seat

adjustment buttons is pressed during

recall.

When driving, it is not possible to

recall a driving position.

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is stationary.

Storing your driving position

– adjust the driver seat using

switches 3, 4 and 5 (refer to previous

page);

– adjust the door mirrors;

– from the multifunction screen, select

menu “Vehicle”, “Seats”, “Settings”

then “Position” and select “Save”.

The positions of the door mirrors when

driving forwards, in reverse and of the

driver seat are saved.

Position

Visual feedback

Recall

Save

1.28

Always wear your seat belt when tra-

velling in your vehicle. You must also

comply with the legislation of the parti-

cular country you are in.

SEAT BELTS (1/3)

Make sure that the rear seats are

locked in position properly so that

the rear seat belts will operate effi-

ciently. Refer to the information on

“rear seat functions” and “adjusting

the rear seats” in Section 3.

Seat belts which are incor-

rectly adjusted or twisted

may cause injuries in the

event of an accident.

Use one seat belt per person,

whether child or adult.

Even pregnant women should wear

a seat belt. In this case, ensure that

the lap belt is not exerting too much

pressure on the abdomen, but do

not allow any slack.

Before starting, first adjust your dri-

ving position, then ask all occupants

to adjust their seat belts to ensure

optimum protection.

Adjusting your driving

position

– Sit well back in your seat (having

first removed your coat or jacket).

This is essential to ensure your back

is positioned correctly;

– adjust the distance between the

seat and the pedals. Your seat

should be as far back as possible

while still allowing you to depress

the clutch pedal fully. The seatback

should be adjusted so that your arms

are slightly bent when you hold the

steering wheel;

– adjust the position of your head-

rest. For maximum safety, your head

must be as close as possible to the

headrest;

– adjust the height of the seat. This

adjustment allows you to select the

seat position which offers you the

best possible view;

– adjust the position of the steering

wheel.

Adjusting the seat belts

Sit with your back firmly against the

seatback.

Shoulder strap 1 should be as close as

possible to the base of the neck but not

on it.

Lap belt 2 should be worn flat over the

thighs and against the pelvis.

The belt should be worn so that it is

as close as possible to your body, ie.:

avoid wearing heavy clothing or kee-

ping bulky objects under the belts, etc.

1.29

SEAT BELTS (2/3)

Locking

Unwind the belt slowly and smoothly

and ensure that buckle 3 locks into

catch 5 (check that it is locked by pul-

ling on buckle 3).

If the belt jams, allow it to return slightly

before attempting to unwind it again.

If your seat belt is completely jammed,

pull slowly, but firmly, so that just over

3 cm unwinds. Allow it to return slightly

before attempting to unwind it again.

If there is still a problem, contact an ap-

proved dealer.

Driver’s seat belt reminder

and, depending on the vehi-

cle, front passenger seat belt remin-

der

This lights up on the interior rear-view

mirror when starting the engine then,

if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat

belt (if this seat is occupied) is not fas-

tened and the vehicle has reached

approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), it

flashes and a bleep sounds for around

120 seconds.

Note: an object placed on the passen-

ger seat base may activate the warning

light in some cases.

Rear seat belt reminder (depending

on vehicle)

Warning light

ß lights up on the

instrument panel, accompanied by the

graphic 6 for approximately 30 seconds

each time the vehicle is started, a door

is opened or a rear seat belt is fastened

or unfastened.

Check that the rear passengers are

wearing seat belts and that the number

of seat belts shown as fastened cor-

responds to the number of rear seat

places occupied.

On the graphic 6:

– marker in green: seat belt fastened;

– marker in red: seat belt unfastened.

Unfastening

Press button 4 and the seat belt will be

rewound by the inertia reel. Guide the

belt.

1.30

SEAT BELTS (3/3)

Adjusting the height of the

front seat belts

Use button 7 to adjust the seat belt

height so that the shoulder strap is worn

as shown previously. Press the button 7

and raise or lower the seat belt. Make

sure that the seat belt is locked in posi-

tion correctly after you have adjusted it.

The following information applies

to the vehicle’s front and rear seat

belts.

– No modification may be made to the component parts of the originally

fitted restraint system: belts, seats and their mountings. For special op-

erations (e.g. fitting child seats) contact an authorised dealer.

– Do not use devices which allow any slack in the belts (e.g. clothes

pegs, clips, etc.): a seat belt which is worn too loosely may cause injury in the

event of an accident.

– Never wear the shoulder strap under your arm or behind your back.

– Never use the same belt for more than one person and never hold a baby or

child on your lap with your seat belt around them.

– The belt should never be twisted.

– Following an accident, have the seat belts checked and replaced if necessary.

Always replace your seat belts as soon as they show any signs of wear.

– Make sure that the buckle is inserted into the appropriate catch.

– Ensure that no objects are placed in the area around the seat belt catch as

they could prevent it from being properly secured.

– When refitting the rear seats, make sure the seat belts are correctly positioned

so that they can be used correctly.

– Make sure the seat belt catch is properly positioned (it should not be hidden

away, crushed or flattened by people or objects).

1.31

Second row centre rear seat

Unwind belt 5 slowly from its housing 4.

Click buckle 9 into black catch 8.

Snap the last sliding buckle 6 into the

red catch 7.

To store the seat belt, push it into the

housing 4 and put the two buckles in

their respective locations A and B.

Second row rear side seats

Slowly unwind belt 1.

Click the sliding buckle 2 into the corre-

sponding red catch 3.

Check that the rear seat

belts are positioned and

operating correctly each

time the rear seats are

moved.

Rear seat functions

Refer to the information on “Rear

seat functions” in Section 3.

REAR SEAT BELTS

Third row rear seats (7-seater

versions)

Slowly unwind the strap 10.

Click the buckle 11 into the correspond-

ing black catch 12.

1.32

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (1/4)

Depending on the vehicle, they are

composed of:

– seat belt inertia reel pretension-

ers;

– central seat belt pretensioners;

– chest-level load limiter;

– air bags for driver and front pas-

senger.

These systems are designed to act in-

dependently or together when the vehi-

cle is subjected to a frontal impact.

Depending on the severity of the

impact, the system can trigger:

– seat belt locking;

– the seat belt inertia reel pretensioner

(which engages to correct seat belt

slack);

– the lap belt pretensioners to hold the

occupant in his seat;

– the front airbag.

Pretensioners

The pretensioners hold the seat belt

against the body, holding the occupant

more securely against the seat, thus in-

creasing the seat belt’s efficiency.

In the event of a severe frontal impact

and if the ignition is switched on, the

system may engage the following de-

pending on the force of the impact:

– the seat belt inertia reel preten-

sioner 1 which instantly retracts the

seat belt;

– the lap pretensioner 2 on the front

seats.

– Have the entire restraint

system checked following

an accident.

– No operation whatso-

ever is permitted on any part of

the system (pretensioners, air

bags, computers, wiring) and the

system components must not

be reused on any other vehicle,

even if identical.

– To avoid incorrect triggering of

the system which may cause

injury, only qualified personnel

from an approved Dealer may

work on the pretensioner and air

bag system.

– The electric trigger system may

only be tested by a specially

trained technician using special

equipment.

– When the vehicle is scrapped,

contact an approved Dealer for

disposal of the pretensioner and

air bag gas generators.

1.33

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (2/4)

Load limiter

Above a certain severity of impact, this

mechanism is used to limit the force of

the belt against the body so that it is at

an acceptable level.

airbags for driver and

passenger

Fitted to the driver and passenger side.

The presence of this equipment is in-

dicated by the word “Air bag” on the

steering wheel and dashboard (air bag

zone A) and, depending on the vehicle,

a symbol on the lower section of the

windscreen.

Each air bag system consists of:

– an air bag and gas generator fitted

on the steering wheel for the driver

and in the dashboard for the front

passenger;

– an electronic unit for system monitor-

ing which controls the gas generator

electrical trigger system;

– remote sensors;

– a single warning light

å on the

instrument panel.

The air bag system uses

pyrotechnic principles. This

explains why, when the air

bag inflates, it will gener-

ate heat, produce smoke (this does

not mean that a fire is about to start)

and make a noise upon detonation.

In a situation where an air bag is

required, it will inflate immediately

and this may cause some minor, su-

perficial grazing to the skin or other

problems.

1.34

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (3/4)

Operation

This system is only operational when

the ignition is switched on.

In a severe frontal impact, the air bags

inflate rapidly, cushioning the impact

of the driver’s head and chest against

the steering wheel and of the front pas-

senger against the dashboard. The air

bags then deflate immediately so that

the passengers are not in any way hin-

dered from leaving the vehicle.

Operating faults

å This warning light comes on

when the engine is started and then

goes out after approximately three sec-

onds.

If it does not come on when the ignition

is switched on or if it stays on, there is a

fault in the system.

Contact your approved Dealer as soon

as possible.

Your protection will be reduced until this

fault is rectified.

1.35

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (4/4)

Warnings concerning the driver’s air bag

– Do not modify the steering wheel or the steering wheel boss.

– Do not cover the steering wheel boss under any circumstances.

– Do not attach any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the steering wheel boss.

– The steering wheel must not be removed (except by qualified personnel from our Network).

– Do not sit too close to the steering wheel when driving: Sit with your arms slightly bent (see the information on “Adjusting

your driving position” in Section 1). This will allow sufficient space for the air bag to deploy correctly and to be fully effective.

Warnings concerning the passenger air bag

– Do not attach or glue any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the dashboard on or near the air bag.

– Do not place anything between the dashboard and the passenger (pet, umbrella, walking stick, parcels, etc.).

– The passenger must not put his or her feet on the dashboard or seat as there is a risk that serious injuries may be sustained.

In general, parts of the body should be kept away from the dashboard (knees, hands, head, etc.)

– The devices in addition to the front passenger seat belt should be reactivated as soon as a child seat is removed, to ensure

the protection of the passenger in the event of an impact.

A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT MUST NOT BE FITTED TO THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT UNLESS

THE ADDITIONAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, I.E. THE PASSENGER AIR BAG, ARE DEACTIVATED.

(refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag” in Section 1)

All of the warnings below are given so that the air bag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent

the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when the air bag inflates.

1.36

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE REAR SEAT BELTS

Force limiter

Above a certain severity of impact, this

mechanism is used to limit the force of

the belt against the body so that it is at

an acceptable level.

– Have the entire restraint

system checked following

an accident.

– No operation whatsoever

is permitted on any part of the

system (air bags, electronic con-

trol units, wiring) and the system

components must not be reused

on any other vehicle, even if iden-

tical.

– Only qualified personnel from

our Network may work on the air

bags; otherwise the system may

trigger accidentally and cause

injury.

1.37

SIDE PROTECTION DEVICES

Warning concerning the side air bag

– Fitting seat covers: seats equipped with an air bag require covers

specifically designed for your vehicle. Contact an approved Dealer to find

out if these covers are available. The use of any covers other than those

designed for your vehicle (including those designed for another vehicle) may

affect the operation of the air bags and reduce your protection.

– Do not place any accessories, objects or even pets between the seatback, the

door and the internal fittings. Do not cover the seatback with any items such as

clothes or accessories. This may prevent the air bag from operating correctly

or cause injury when the air bag is deployed.

– No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on the seat or internal

fittings, except by qualified personnel from an approved dealer.

– These airbags operate through slits in the front seatbacks (door side): Never

place any objects here.

Side air bags

These air bags are fitted to the front

seats and are activated at the sides of

the seats (door side) to protect the oc-

cupants in the event of a severe side

impact.

Curtain air bags

These are air bags fitted along the sides

of the vehicle in the ceiling which trigger

along the front and rear side windows

to protect the passengers in case of a

severe side impact.

Depending on the vehicle, a mark-

ing on the windscreen informs you

of the presence of additional means

of restraint (airbags, pretensioners,

etc.) in the passenger compartment.

1.38

ADDITIONAL METHODS OF RESTRAINT

The airbag is designed to complement the action of the seat belt. Both the air bags and seat belts are integral parts of

the same protection system. It is therefore essential to wear seat belts at all times. If seat belts are not worn, the oc-

cupants are exposed to the risk of serious injury in the event of an accident. It may also increase the risk of minor su-

perficial injuries occurring when the airbag is deployed, although such minor injuries are always possible with air bags.

If the vehicle should overturn or in the event of a rear impact, however severe, the pretensioners and airbags are not always

triggered. Impacts to the underside of the vehicle, e.g. from pavements, potholes or stones, can all trigger these systems.

– No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on any part of the airbag system (airbags, pretensioners, computer,

wiring harness, etc.), except by qualified Network personnel.

– To ensure that the system is in good working order and to avoid accidental triggering of the system which may cause injury,

only qualified Network personnel may work on the airbag system.

– As a safety precaution, have the airbag system checked if your vehicle has been involved in an accident, or is stolen or

broken into.

– When selling or lending the vehicle, inform the user of these points and hand over this handbook with the vehicle.

– When scrapping your vehicle, contact your approved Dealer for disposal of the gas generator(s).

All of the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent

the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when it inflates.

1.39

CHILD SAFETY: General information (1/2)

Carrying children

Children, and adults, must be correctly

seated and strapped in for all journeys.

The children being carried in your vehi-

cle are your responsibility.

A child is not a miniature adult. Children

are at risk of specific injuries as their

muscles and bones have not yet fin-

ished growing. The seat belt alone

would not provide suitable protection.

Use an approved child seat and ensure

you use it correctly.

A collision at 30 mph

(50 km/h) is the same as fall-

ing a distance of 10 metres.

Transporting a child without

a restraint is the equivalent of allow-

ing him or her to play on a fourth-

floor balcony without railings.

Never travel with a child held in your

arms. In the event of an accident,

you will not be able to keep hold of

the child, even if you yourself are

wearing a seat belt.

If your vehicle has been involved in

a road accident, replace the child

seat and have the seat belts and

ISOFIX anchorage points checked.

To prevent the doors being

opened, use the “Child

safety” device (refer to the

information on “Opening

and closing the doors” in Section 1).

Driver’s responsibility

when parking or stopping

the vehicle

Never leave an animal,

child or adult who is not self-suffi-

cient alone on your vehicle, even for

a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the

electric windows or by locking the

doors.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,

please remember that the tempera-

ture inside the passenger compart-

ment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS

INJURY.

1.40

CHILD SAFETY: General information (2/2)

Using a child seat

The level of protection offered by the

child seat depends on its ability to re-

strain your child and on its installation.

Incorrect installation compromises the

protection it offers the child in the event

of harsh braking or an impact.

Before purchasing a child seat, check

that it complies with the regulations for

the country you are in and that it can

be fitted in your vehicle. Consult an ap-

proved dealer to find out which seats

are recommended for your vehicle.

Before fitting a child seat, read the

manual and respect its instructions. If

you experience any difficulties during

installation, contact the manufacturer

of the equipment. Keep the instructions

with the seat.

Set a good example by always fas-

tening your seat belt and teaching

your child:

– to strap themselves in correctly;

– to always get in and out of the car

at the kerb, away from busy traf-

fic.

Do not use a second-hand child

seat or one without an instruction

manual.

Check that there are no objects in

the vicinity of the child seat which

could impede its operation.

Never leave a child unat-

tended in the vehicle.

Check that your child is

always strapped in and that

the belt or safety harness used is

correctly set and adjusted. Avoid

wearing bulky clothing which could

cause the belts to slacken.

Never let your child put their head or

arms out of the window.

Check that the child is in the correct

position for the entire journey, espe-

cially if asleep.

1.41

CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat

Rear-facing child seats

A baby’s head is, proportionally, heavier

than that of an adult and its neck is very

fragile. Transport the child in this po-

sition for as long as possible (until the

age of 2 at the very least). It supports

both the head and the neck.

Choose a bucket type seat for best side

protection and change it as soon as the

child’s head is higher than the shell.

Forward-facing child seats

The child’s head and abdomen need to

be protected as a priority. A forward-fac-

ing child seat which is firmly attached to

the vehicle will reduce the risk of impact

to the head. Ensure your child travels in

a forward-facing seat with a harness for

as long as their size permits.

Choose a bucket type seat for optimum

side protection.

Booster cushions

From 15 kg or 4 years, the child can

travel using a booster seat, which will

enable the seat belt to be adapted to

suit his/her size and shape. The boos-

ter seat cushion must be fitted with

guides to position the seat belt on the

child’s thighs rather than the stomach.

It is recommended that you use a seat-

back fitted with a belt strap guide which

can be adjusted in terms of height to

position the seat belt in the centre of the

shoulder. It must never rest on the neck

or on the arm.

Choose a bucket type seat for optimum

side protection.

1.42

CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (1/3)

There are two ways of attaching child

seats: via the seat belt or using the

ISOFIX system.

The seat belt must never

be twisted or the tension

relieved. Never pass the

shoulder strap under the

arm or behind the back.

Check that the seat belt has not

been damaged by sharp edges.

If the seat belt does not operate nor-

mally, it will not protect the child.

Consult an approved dealer. Do not

use this seat until the seat belt has

been repaired.

Do not use the child seat

if it may unfasten the seat

belt restraining it: the base

of the seat must not rest on

the buckle and/or catch of the seat

belt.

Attachment via the seat belt

The seat belt must be adjusted to

ensure that it is effective in the event of

harsh braking or an impact.

Ensure that the strap paths indicated

by the child seat manufacturer are re-

spected.

Always check that the seat belt is cor-

rectly fastened by pulling it up, then

pulling it out fully whilst pressing on the

child seat.

Check that the seat is correctly held by

moving it from side to side and back

to front: the seat should remain firmly

fixed.

Check that the child seat has not been

installed at an angle and that it is not

resting against a window.

1.43

Attachment using the ISOFIX

system

Approved child seats ISOFIX are stand-

ardised in accordance with current reg-

ulations if any of the four cases below

applies:

– ISOFIX universal 3-point forward-

facing seat;

– ISOFIX semi-universal 2-point seat;

– Specific;

– i-Size Which has:

– either a belt which attaches to the

third ring of the seat concerned;

– or a stay that rests on the vehi-

cle floor, compatible with the ap-

proved seat i-Size, the role of

which is to prevent the child seat

from moving in the event of a col-

lision.

In the latter three cases check that your

child seat can be installed by consulting

the list of compatible vehicles.

No modifications may be

made to the component

parts of the restraint system

(ISOFIX seat belts, seats

and their mountings) originally fitted.

Before using an ISOFIX

child seat that you pur-

chased for another vehicle,

check that its installation is

authorised. Consult the list of ve-

hicles which can be fitted with the

seat from the equipment manufac-

turer.

CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (2/3)

Attach the child seat with the ISOFIX

locks, if these are provided. The ISOFIX

system allows quick, easy, safe fitting.

The ISOFIX system consists of 2 rings

and, in some cases, a third ring.

1.44

CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (3/3)

The third ring 3, 4 or 5 is used to attach

the upper strap on some seats ISOFIX.

The ISOFIX anchorage points have been exclusively designed for child

seats with the ISOFIX system. Never fit a different type of child seat, seat

belt or other objects to these anchorage points. Check that nothing is ob-

structing the anchorage points.

If your vehicle has been involved in a road accident, have the ISOFIX anchorage

points checked and replace your child seat.

Attachment using the ISOFIX

system (continued)

The two rings 1 are located between

the seatback and the seat base of the

seat and are identified by a marking.

To ensure your child seat can be easily

fitted and locked on the rings 1, use

access guides 2 on the child seat.

The rings are located on the rear seat-

backs and indicated by the symbol

.

In all cases, attach the strap hook to

the corresponding ring (3 and 5 for the

rear side seats and 4 for the rear centre

seat) and place the seat in the desired

position.

Pull the belt so that the back of the child

seat comes into contact with the back

of the vehicle seat.

The child seat strap must

be attached to the corre-

sponding ring.

Do not use any other

mounting point.

Check that the seatback

of the forward-facing child

seat is in contact with the

seatback of the vehicle

seat. In this case, the child seat may

not always rest on the seat base of

the vehicle seat.

1.45

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (1/2)

The types of child seat indicated may

not be available. Before using a differ-

ent child seat, check with the manufac-

turer that it can be fitted.

In the front seat

The laws concerning children travel-

ling in the front passenger seat differ in

every country. Consult the legislation in

force and follow the indications on the

diagram on the following page.

Before fitting a child seat in this seat (if

authorised):

– lower the seat belt as far as possible;

– move the seat as far back as possi-

ble;

– gently tilt the seatback away from

vertical (approximately 25°);

– on equipped vehicles, raise the seat

base as far as possible.

In all situations, reinsert the headrest to

its full extent so that it does not interfere

with the child seat (see the information

on “Front headrests” in Section 1);

Some seats are not suitable for fitting

child seats. The diagram on the follow-

ing page shows you how to attach a

child seat.

Fit the child seat in a rear

seat wherever possible.

Make sure that the child

seat or the child’s feet do

not prevent the front seat from lock-

ing correctly. Refer to the informa-

tion on the “Front seat” in Section 1.

Check that when installing the child

seat in the vehicle it is not at risk of

coming loose from its base.

If you have to remove the headrest,

check that it is correctly stored so

that it does not come loose under

harsh braking or impact.

Always attach the child seat to the

vehicle even if it is not in use so that

it does not come loose under harsh

braking or impact.

RISK OF DEATH OR

SERIOUS INJURY: before

fitting a rear-facing child

seat to this seat, check

that the air bag has been deacti-

vated (refer to the information on

“Child safety: deactivating/activat-

ing the front passenger air bag” in

Section 1).

After installing the child seat, if neces-

sary, the seat may be advanced (so as

to leave enough space in the rear seats

for passengers or other child seats).

For a rear-facing child seat, do not let

it touch the dashboard or move it to the

furthest forward position.

Do not change other settings after in-

stalling the child seat.

1.46

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (2/2)

In the rear seat

A carrycot can be installed across the

vehicle and will take up at least two

seats. Position the child with his or her

feet nearest the door.

Move the front seat as far forward as

possible to install a rear-facing child

seat, then move back the seat in front

as far as it will go, although without al-

lowing it to come into contact with the

child seat.

For the safety of the child in the for-

ward-facing position:

– move the relevant seat backwards

as far as possible;

– move the seat in front of the child

forwards, and set the position of the

seatback to avoid contact between

the seat and the child’s legs.

Always remove the headrest from the

rear seat used for the child seat (see

“Rear headrests” in Section 3). If nec-

essary, position the vehicle seat as far

back as possible. This must be done

before fitting the child seat.

Check that the child seat is resting

against the back of the vehicle seat.

Ensure that the child seat

or the child’s feet do not

prevent the front seat from

locking correctly. Refer to

the information on the “Front seat”

in Section 1 or “Rear seat operation”

in Section 3.

The floor of your vehicle

has storage spaces. Before

installing a child seat with

a floor support, ensure that

this seat can be correctly installed

by consulting the list of compatible

vehicles supplied with the child seat.

Risk of serious injury in the event of

sudden braking or accident.

When fitting a child seat

(Group 2 or 3 booster seat),

check that the seat belts op-

erate (wind) correctly: refer

to Section 1 “Rear seat belts”. If

necessary, adjust the position of the

vehicle seat.

For 7-seater vehicles, a

child seat with a stay should

never be installed on the

third row rear seats.

For 7-seater vehicles, the second row

rear seats must be pushed forward

before a child is seated in the third row

rear seats.

1.47

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (1/6)

Visual installation of the five-seater version

RISK OF DEATH OR

SERIOUS INJURY: Before

installing a child seat on the

front passenger seat, check

that the airbag has been deacti-

vated (please refer to “Child safety:

front passenger airbag deactivation

and activation” in Section 1).

Using a child safety system

which is not approved for

this vehicle will not correctly

protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

³ Check the status of the airbag

before fitting a child seat or allowing a

passenger to use the seat.

Seat not suitable for fitting

child seats.

Child seat attached using the belt

¬ Seat which allows a child seat

with “Universal” approval to be attached

by a seat belt.

1.48

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (2/6)

Five-seater version

Type of child seat Weight of the child

Front passenger

seat (1)

Rear side seats Rear centre seat

Carrycot fitted

across the vehicle

Group 0

< 10 kg X U (2) X

Rear-facing shell

seat

Groups 0 or 0 +

< 10 kg and < 13 kg U (5) U (3) U (3)

Shell seat/rear-facing

seat

Groups 0+ and 1

< 13 kg and 9 to 18 kg U (5) U (3) U (3)

Forward-facing seat

Group 1

9 to 18 kg X U (3) (4) U (3) (4)

Booster seat

Groups 2 and 3

15 to 25 kg and 22 to

36 kg

X U (3) (4) U (3) (4)

(1) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: Before installing a child seat on the front passenger seat, check that

the airbag has been deactivated (please refer to “Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation and activation” in

Section 1).

The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous page, to ensure the applica-

ble regulations are respected.

1.49

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.

U = Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.

(2) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest

the door.

(3) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-

facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the

child seat.

(4) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the

child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,

move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.

(5) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (3/6)

1.50

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (4/6)

Seven-seat version

Type of child seat Weight of the child

Front passenger

seat (1)

Row 2 rear

side seats

Row 2 rear

centre seat

Row 3 rear

centre seat (5)

Carrycot fitted

across the vehicle

Group 0

< 10 kg X U (2) X U

Rear-facing shell

seat

Groups 0 or 0 +

< 10 kg and < 13 kg U (6) U (3) U (3) U

Shell seat/rear-facing

seat

Groups 0+ and 1

< 13 kg and 9 to 18 kg U (6) U (3) U (3) U

Forward-facing seat

Group 1

9 to 18 kg X U (3) (4) U (3) (4) U

Booster seat

Groups 2 and 3

15 to 25 kg and 22 to

36 kg

X U (3) (4) U (3) (4) U

(1) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: Before installing a child seat on the front passenger seat, check that

the airbag has been deactivated (please refer to “Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation and activation” in

Section 1).

The table below summarises the information already shown in the diagram on the following pages, to ensure the appli-

cable regulations are respected.

1.51

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (5/6)

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.

U = Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.

(2) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest

the door.

(3) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-

facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the

child seat.

(4) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the

child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,

move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.

(5) Push the seat(s) in front of the child in a third row seat as far forward as possible.

(6) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).

1.52

³ Check the status of the airbag

before fitting a child seat or allowing a

passenger to use the seat.

Seat not suitable for fitting

child seats.

Child seat attached using the belt

¬ Seat which allows a child seat

with “Universal” approval to be attached

by a seat belt.

Using a child safety system

which is not approved for

this vehicle will not correctly

protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

RISK OF DEATH OR

SERIOUS INJURY: Before

installing a child seat on the

front passenger seat, check

that the airbag has been deacti-

vated (please refer to “Child safety:

front passenger airbag deactivation

and activation” in Section 1).

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (6/6)

Installation diagram, 7-seater version

1.53

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX system (1/6)

Child seat fitted using the ISOFIX

mounting

 Seat which allows an ISOFIX

child seat to be fitted.

± The rear seats are fitted with

an anchorage point which allows a

forward-facing ISOFIX child seat with

universal approval to be attached. The

anchorage points are located on the

backs of the rear seats.

The size of the ISOFIX child seat is in-

dicated by a letter:

– A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats

in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);

– C and D: shell seat or rear-facing

seats in group 0+ (less than 13 kg)

or group 1 (9 to 18 kg);

– E: rear-facing shell seats in group 0

(less than 10 kg) or 0+ (less than

13 kg);

– F and G: cots in group 0 (less than

10 kg).

Using a child safety system

which is not approved for

this vehicle will not correctly

protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

Seat which does not allow a

child seat to be fitted.

Visual installation of the five-seater version

1.54

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX system (2/6)

Five-seater version

Type of child seat

Weight of

the child

Seat size ISOFIX

Front passenger

seat

Rear side seats Rear centre seat

Carrycot fitted across

the vehicle

Group 0

< 10 kg F, G X X X

Rear-facing shell

seat

Groups 0 or 0 +

< 10 kg and

< 13 kg

E X IL (1) IL (1)

Shell seat/rear-facing

seat

Groups 0+ and 1

< 13 kg and 9 to

18 kg

C, D X IL (1) IL (1)

Forward-facing seat

Group 1

9 to 18 kg A, B, B1 X IUF - IL (1) (2) IUF - IL (1) (2)

Booster seat

Groups 2 and 3

15 to 25 kg and

22 to 36 kg

X IUF - IL (1) (2) IUF - IL (1) (2)

Seat i-Size X i-U i-U

The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous page, to ensure the regula-

tions in force are respected.

1.55

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats ISOFIX.

IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal/semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be at-

tached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.

i-U = Suitable for the i-Size restraint devices in the “universal” forward-facing and backward-facing category.

(1) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-

facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the

child seat.

(2) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the

child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,

move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX system (3/6)

1.56

Seven-seat version

Type of child seat

Weight of

the child

Seat size

ISOFIX

Front

passenger

seat

Row 2 rear

side seats

Row 2 rear

centre seat

Row 3 rear

centre

seat (3)

Carrycot fitted across

the vehicle

Group 0

< 10 kg F, G X X X X

Rear-facing shell

seat

Groups 0 or 0 +

< 10 kg and

< 13 kg

E X IL (1) IL (1) X

Shell seat/rear-facing

seat

Groups 0+ and 1

< 13 kg and 9 to

18 kg

C, D X IL (1) IL (1) X

Forward-facing seat

Group 1

9 to 18 kg A, B, B1 X IUF - IL (1) (2) IUF - IL (1) (2) X

Booster seat

Groups 2 and 3

15 to 25 kg and

22 to 36 kg

X IUF - IL (1) (2) IUF - IL (1) (2) X

Seat i-Size X i-U i-U X

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (4/6)

The table below summarises the information already shown in the diagram on the following pages, to ensure the appli-

cable regulations are respected.

1.57

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats ISOFIX.

IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal/semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be at-

tached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.

i-U = Suitable for the i-Size restraint devices in the “universal” forward-facing and backward-facing category.

(1) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-

facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the

child seat.

(2) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the

child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,

move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.

(3) Push the seat(s) in front of the child in a third row seat as far forward as possible.

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (5/6)

1.58

Visual installation of seven-seater version

Child seat fitted using the ISOFIX

mounting

 Seat which allows an ISOFIX

child seat to be fitted.

± The rear seats are fitted with

an anchorage point which allows a

forward-facing ISOFIX child seat with

universal approval to be attached. The

anchorage points are located on the

backs of the rear seats.

The size of the ISOFIX child seat is in-

dicated by a letter:

– A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats

in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);

– C and D: shell seat or rear-facing

seats in group 0+ (less than 13 kg)

or group 1 (9 to 18 kg);

– E: rear-facing shell seats in group 0

(less than 10 kg) or 0+ (less than

13 kg);

– F and G: cots in group 0 (less than

10 kg).

Using a child safety system

which is not approved for

this vehicle will not correctly

protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

Seat which does not allow a

child seat to be fitted.

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (6/6)

1.59

Front passenger air bag

deactivation

You must deactivate certain devices

in addition to the front passenger seat

belt before fitting a child seat in the front

passenger seat.

The front passenger air bag

must only be deactivated or

activated when the vehicle

is stationary.

If it is interfered with when the ve-

hicle is being driven, indicator lights

å and © will come on.

Switch the ignition off then on again

to reset the air bag in accordance

with the lock position.

CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag (1/3)

To deactivate the air bag: when the

vehicle is stationary, push and turn

lock 1 to the OFF position.

With the ignition on, you must check

that the warning light

¹ on the

rear-view mirror 2 is switched on.

This light remains permanently lit to

let you know that you can fit a child

seat.

DANGER

Since operation of the front

passenger airbag is not

compatible with the position

of a rear-facing child seat, NEVER

fit a restraint system for a rear-fac-

ing child in a seat protected by an

ACTIVATED front AIRBAG. This

can cause the CHILD’S DEATH or

SERIOUS INJURY.

1.60

The markings on the dashboard and

labels A on each side of the passen-

ger sun visor 3 (example: label shown

above) remind you of these instruc-

tions.

CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag (2/3)

DANGER

Since operation of the front

passenger airbag is not

compatible with the position

of a rear-facing child seat, NEVER

fit a restraint system for a rear-fac-

ing child in a seat protected by an

ACTIVATED front AIRBAG. This

can cause the CHILD’S DEATH or

SERIOUS INJURY.

1.61

CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag (3/3)

Operating faults

It is forbidden to fit a rear-facing child

seat to the front passenger seat if the

airbag activation/deactivation system is

faulty.

Allowing any other passenger to sit in

that seat is not recommended.

Contact your approved dealer as soon

as possible.

Activation of the front

passenger air bag

You should reactivate the air bag as

soon as you remove the child seat from

the front passenger seat to ensure the

protection of the front passenger in the

event of an impact.

To reactivate the airbags : with the

vehicle at a standstill, and the igni-

tion off, push and turn lock 1 to the ON

position.

With the ignition on, it is essential to

check that the warning light

] is off

and that the warning light

 comes

on rear-view mirror 2 for about 1 minute

after each start-up.

The front passenger seat belt additional

restraint systems are activated.

The front passenger air bag

must only be deactivated or

activated when the vehicle

is stationary.

If it is interfered with when the ve-

hicle is being driven, indicator lights

å and © will come on.

Switch the ignition off then on again

to reset the air bag in accordance

with the lock position.

1.62

DRIVING POSITION (1/2)

157

9 9

1 2

1.63

DRIVING POSITION (2/2)

The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

1 Side air vent.

2 Side window demister outlet.

3 Stalk for:

– direction indicator lights;

– exterior lights;

– rear fog lights.

4 Driver Airbag and horn location.

5 Instrument panel.

6 Head-up display.

7 Controls for:

– on-board computer information

read-out and vehicle settings cus-

tomisation menu,

– remote radio and navigation

system.

8 Steering column stalk for wind-

screen and rear screen wash/

wiper.

9 Centre air vents.

10 Windscreen demister outlet.

11 Multimedia touchscreen.

12 Multifunction screen controls:

– screen activation/deactivation;

– volume;

– welcome menu;

– driving aids menu;

– settings.

13 Heating or air conditioning con-

trols.

14 Switches for:

– hazard warning lights,

– electric door locking.

15 Passenger Airbag location.

16 Storage drawer.

17 Controls for:

– heated front seats,

– activation/deactivation of ECO

mode,

– activation/deactivation of assisted

parking,

– activation/deactivation of the Stop

and Start function.

18 Storage compartment.

19 Assisted parking brake control.

20 Cruise control/speed limiter main

control.

21 Central multifunction and Multi-

Sense control.

22 Manual gearbox gear lever.

23 Automatic gearbox gear lever.

24 Engine start/stop button.

Control for adjusting steering

wheel height and reach.

26 Cruise control/speed limiter and

adaptive cruise control controls.

27 Bonnet release control.

28 Automatic tailgate opening/closing

control.

1.64

Side light warning light

Main beam headlight tell-

tale

Dipped beam headlight tell-

tale

Rear fog lights tell-tale



Automatic main beam head-

light indicator light

Please refer to the information

on “External signals and lights” in

Section 1.

Left-hand direction indicator

tell-tale

Right-hand direction indica-

tor tell-tale

Low fuel level warning light

It lights up orange when the ig-

nition or the engine is switched on and

goes off after a few seconds.

If it comes on orange while driving and

is accompanied by a beep, fill up with

fuel as soon as possible. There is only

approximately 30 miles (50 km) worth

of fuel left.

If no lights or sounds are ap-

parent, this indicates a fault

in the instrument panel. This

indicates that it is essential

to stop immediately (as soon as traf-

fic conditions allow). Ensure that the

vehicle is correctly immobilised and

contact an approved Dealer.

Instrument panelA: lights up when the

driver’s door is opened.

In some cases, the appearance of a

warning light is accompanied by a mes-

sage.

The © warning light means

you should drive very carefully to

an approved dealer as soon as pos-

sible. If you fail to follow this recom-

mendation, you risk damaging your

vehicle.

Warning light ® re-

quires you to stop immedi-

ately, for your own safety,

as soon as traffic conditions allow.

Switch off the engine and do not re-

start it. Contact an approved Dealer.

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

WARNING LIGHTS (1/6)

1.65

WARNING LIGHTS (2/6)

STOP light

This lights up when the igni-

tion or engine is switched on and goes

out as soon as the engine is running. It

comes on with other warning lights and/

or messages, and is accompanied by

a beep.

It requires you to stop immediately, for

your own safety, as soon as traffic con-

ditions allow. Switch off the engine and

do not restart it.

Contact an approved Dealer.

Oil pressure warning light

It lights up when the ignition or

the engine is switched on and goes off

after a few seconds.

If it comes on on the road, accompa-

nied by the

® warning light and

a beep, stop immediately and cut the

ignition.

Check the oil level. If the level is normal,

the indicator light is being lit by some-

thing else. Contact an approved Dealer.

Variable power-assisted

steering warning light

It lights up when the ignition or the

engine is switched on and goes off after

a few seconds.

If it comes on while driving, alongside

the warning light

®, this means

there is a system fault.

Contact an authorised dealer.

Brake circuit fault warning

light

It lights up when the ignition or the

engine is switched on and goes off after

a few seconds.

If it comes on during braking and is ac-

companied by the

® warning light

and a beep, it indicates that the fluid

level in the circuit is low or that there is

a braking system fault. Stop as soon as

traffic conditions allow and contact an

authorised dealer.

Battery charge warning light

It lights up when the ignition or

the engine is switched on and goes off

after a few seconds.

If it comes on on the road, accompa-

nied by the

® warning light and a

beep, this indicates an overload or dis-

charge in the electrical circuit.

Stop as soon as traffic conditions allow

and contact an approved Dealer.

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

1.66

Anti-lock braking warning

light

It lights up when the ignition or the

engine is switched on and goes off after

a few seconds.

If it lights up when you are driving, it in-

dicates a fault in the anti-lock braking

system.

Braking will then be as normal, without

the ABS. Contact an approved Dealer

as soon as possible.

Coolant temperature warn-

ing light

This lights up red when the ignition is

switched on or the engine is started.

If it turns red, stop and let the engine

idle for a minute or two.

The temperature should lower and the

warning light should return to a blue

colour. If not, stop the engine. Let the

engine cool down before checking the

coolant.

Contact an approved Dealer.

WARNING LIGHTS (3/6)

Warning light

This lights up when the ignition

or engine is switched on and goes out

as soon as the engine is running. It can

light up in conjunction with other warn-

ing lights and/or messages on the in-

strument panel.

It means you should drive very care-

fully to an approved dealer as soon as

possible. If you fail to follow this recom-

mendation, you risk damaging your ve-

hicle.

Toxic Fume Filter System

Warning Light

For vehicles equipped with this option,

the light comes on when the ignition is

switched on then goes out.

– If it lights up continuously, consult

your approved dealer as soon as

possible;

– if it flashes, reduce the engine speed

until the light stops flashing. Contact

your approved Dealer as soon as

possible.

Refer to the information on “Advice:

antipollution, fuel economy and driving”

in Section 2.



Warning light for electronic

stability program ( ESC ) and

traction control system

It lights up when the ignition or the

engine is switched on and goes off after

a few seconds.

There are several reasons for the warn-

ing light to come on: please refer to the

information on “Driver correction de-

vices and aids” in Section 2.

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

1.67

WARNING LIGHTS (4/6)

Preheating warning light

(diesel version)

This should come on when the igni-

tion is switched on. It indicates that the

heater plugs are in operation.

It goes out when preheating is com-

plete. The engine can be started.

2 Door(s) open warning light

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Air bag warning light

This warning light will be dis-

played on the instrument panel when

the ignition is switched on or the engine

is started, and will then go out after a

few seconds.

If it does not come on when the igni-

tion is switched on, or comes on when

the engine is running, there is a fault in

the system.

Contact your approved Dealer as soon

as possible.

Brake pedal warning light

This lights up when the brake

pedal should be depressed. Refer to

the information on the “Automatic gear-

box” in Section 2.

Please refer to the information on

“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in

Section 2.

}

Handbrake or electronic

parking brake warning light

Refer to the information on the “Assisted

parking brake” in Section 2.

Rear seat belt reminder (depending

on vehicle)

Warning light

ß comes on, accom-

panied (depending on the vehicle) by

a message indicating the number of

fastened seat belts on the instrument

panel for approximately 30 seconds,

each time the vehicle is started, a door

is opened or a rear seat belt is fas-

tened/unfastened. Check that the rear

passengers are wearing seat belts and

that the number of seat belts shown as

fastened corresponds to the number of

rear seat places occupied.

Š ‰

Gear change indicator

This lights up to advise you to

change to a higher gear (up arrow) or

lower gear (down arrow).

Please refer to the information on

“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in

Section 2.

1.68

WARNING LIGHTS (5/6)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.



Assisted parking brake fault

light

Please refer to the information on the

“Assisted parking brake” in Section 2.



Emergency active brake

assist

Refer to the information on “Driving cor-

rection devices and aids” in Section 2.



ECO mode warning light

This comes on when ECO

mode is activated.

Please refer to the information on “Eco-

driving” in Section 2.

Î¦

Speed limiter,

cruise control and

adaptive cruise control warning

lights

Please refer to the information on the

“Speed limiter”, “Cruise control” and

“Adaptive cruise control” in Section 2.



Tyre pressure monitoring

system

Refer to the information on the “Tyre

pressure monitoring system” in

Section 2.

Rear seat belt reminder

warning light

This comes on for approximately

30 seconds, each time the vehicle is

started, a door is opened or a rear seat

belt is fastened/unfastened. Please

see the information on “Seat belts” in

Section 1.



Engine standby warning

light

Please see information in the para-

graph on “Stop and Start Function” in

Section 2.



Unavailability of engine

standby warning light

Please see information in the para-

graph on “Stop and Start Function” in

Section 2.

1.69

WARNING LIGHTS (6/6)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

On the rear-view mirror B



Passenger airbag ON

Please refer to the information

on “Child safety: deactivating/activating

the front passenger airbag” in Section 1.

Passenger airbag OFF

Please refer to the information

on “Child safety: deactivating/activating

the front passenger airbag” in Section 1.

Driver’s seat belt reminder

and, depending on the vehi-

cle, front passenger seat belt re-

minder.

This lights up in the rear-view mirror

when the ignition is started then, if the

driver or front passenger seat belt (if

this seat is occupied) is not fastened

and the vehicle has reached approxi-

mately 12 mph (20 km/h), it flashes and

a beep sounds for around 120 seconds.

Note: an object placed on the passen-

ger seat base can activate the warning

light.

1.70

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (1/4)

Instrument panel A

You can customise your instrument

panel with the content and colours of

your choice.

From the multifunction screen, select:

– one of the Multi-Sense modes.

Please refer to the information on

“Multi-Sense” in Section 3;

– menu “System” then “User profile”.

Refer to the handbook for the equip-

ment.

Rev counter 1

(graduations x 1000)

Speedometer 2

This is displayed differently according

to how the instrument panel is custom-

ised.

Overspeed buzzer

Depending on the vehicle and country,

a buzzer sounds for approximately

10 seconds every 40 seconds, as long

as the vehicle is travelling in excess of

72 mph (120 km/h).

Driving style indicator 3

Please refer to the information on “Eco-

driving” in Section 2.

Trip computer and warning

system

Refer to the information on the “Trip

computer and warning system” in

Section 1.

1.71

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (2/4)

Fuel gauge 6

If the level is at the minimum, warn-

ing light

M integrated in the indica-

tor comes on orange, accompanied by

a beep. Fill up as soon as possible.

Engine oil level low warning

When the engine is started, the instru-

ment panel display A alerts you when

the minimum oil level is reached. Refer

to the information on the “Engine oil

level” in Section 4.

The first time the warning appears, it

can be cleared by pressing switch 4

“OK ”.

Subsequent warnings will disappear

automatically after around 30 seconds.

Coolant temperature indicator 5

In normal use, indicator 5 should be

before area B. Under “intensive” ope-

rating conditions, the needle may ap-

proach this zone. This is not serious

unless the warning light

® comes

on accompanied by a message on the

instrument panel and a beep.

1.72

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (3/4)

Head-up display 7

The display details driving and navi-

gation information from the instrument

panel and the multifunction screen.

If fitted to the vehicle, this comes on

when the engine is started and is re-

tracted when the engine is switched off.

You can adjust certain settings from the

multifunction screen: with the engine

running, access menu “System”,

“Display” then “Head-up display”.

Adjusting the display information

height

Depending on your driving position,

you can raise or lower the information

on the display.

Adjusting the display brightness

You can adjust the brightness (day or

night mode)

– automatically: the brightness will

vary depending on the outdoor light.

– manually: the brightness automati-

cally switches with the activation/de-

activation of the lights.

In both cases, the day mode varies

based on the outdoor brightness.

Good information visibility can be af-

fected by:

– the seat position;

– the presence of an object placed

on the opened display;

– the polarisation of some spectacle

lenses;

– extreme weather conditions (rain,

snow, very strong sunlight, etc.).

In the event of contradic-

tory information between

the instrument panel and

the head-up display/multi-

function screen, please refer to the

information displayed on the instru-

ment panel.

Do not manually force the opening/

closure of the head-up display.

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is stationary.

1.73

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (4/4)

Operating faults

In the event of a malfunction (the dis-

play fails to open when the engine is

started, or the display retracts, with the

engine running, following an object im-

pacting the display):

– stop and restart the engine;

– from the multifunction screen,

change the display opening settings.

If there is still a problem, contact an au-

thorised dealer.

With the display opened or closed,

no object should be placed on it or

in its housing.

Do not use solvents, detergents or

an abrasive cloth to clean the dis-

play.

Only use a microfibre wipe.

Multifunction screen B

Please see the equipment instructions

or the sections dealing with the relevant

functions.

1.74

Display selection keys 2

Scroll through the following information

by repeated short presses on button 2

(the display depends on the vehicle

equipment and country):

a) total mileage and trip mileage re-

corder;

b) journey parameters:

– fuel used;

– average fuel consumption;

– current fuel consumption;

– estimated range;

– distance travelled;

– average speed;

c) mileage before service;

d) tyre pressure reset;

e) trip log, operating faults and informa-

tion message readout.

On-board computer 1

Depending on the vehicle, this includes

the following functions:

– distance travelled;

– journey parameters;

– information messages;

– operating fault messages (associ-

ated with the

– warning messages (associated with

the

® warning light);

All these functions are described on the

following pages.

TRIP COMPUTER: general information (1/2)

1.75

ON-BOARD COMPUTER: general information (2/2)

Interpreting some of the

values displayed after

resetting

The values showing average fuel con-

sumption and average speed will

become more stable and reliable the

further you have travelled since the last

time the Reset button was pressed.

The average fuel consumption may de-

crease when:

– the vehicle stops accelerating;

– the engine reaches its operating

temperature (if the engine was cold

when the reset key was pressed);

– when driving from an urban area

onto the open road.

Automatic resetting of the

journey parameters

Resetting occurs automatically when

the maximum value of any of the pa-

rameters is exceeded.

Trip mileage resetting

With “trip mileage recorder” selected

on the display, press key OK 3 until the

mileage recorder resets to zero.

Resetting the journey

parameters (reset button)

with the display showing one of the trip

settings, press key OK 3 until the dis-

play is reset to zero.

1.76

ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (1/5)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

101778 km

a) Total mileage and trip mileage recorder.

112.4 km

Fuel used

b) Journey parameters:

Fuel used.

Fuel consumed since the last reset.

8 L

Middle

Average fuel consumption since the last reset.

The value is displayed after having travelled at least 400 metres since the last

reset.

5.8 L/100

Current

Current fuel consumption.

This value is displayed after a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) is reached.

7.4 L/100

1.77

ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (2/5)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

Range

b) Journey parameters (continued):

Estimated range with remaining fuel.

The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.

541 km

Distance

Distance travelled since last reset.

522 km

Middle

Average speed since the last reset.

The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.

123.4 km/H

1.78

ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (3/5)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections

Interpreting the display selected

On-board computer with mileage-

before-service message

c) Mileage before service or oil change.

Mileage before service

With the ignition switched on, the engine not running and

the display set to “Service Intervals”, press button OK for ap-

proximately 5 seconds to display the mileage before service (dis-

tance or time to the next service). When the range approaches

its limit, there are several possible scenarios:

– distance/time remaining less than 900 miles (1,500 km) or

one month: the message “Service due in” is displayed along

with the nearest limit (distance or time);

– range equal to 0 km/miles or service date reached: the

message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by

warning light

©.

The vehicle requires a service as soon as possible.

Service Intervals

Service in

30 000 Kms / 12 mo

Service due in

300 Kms / 24 days

Service required

Resetting: to reset the distance before service, press and hold button 2 for approximately 10 seconds until the display shows

the mileage permanently.

NB: if a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the

event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.

1.79

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

TRIP COMPUTER: trip settings (4/5)

Examples of selections

Interpreting the display selected

On-board computer with distance before

next service message (cntd.)

c) Mileage before service or oil change.

Mileage before service

With the ignition switched on and the engine not running,

and the selected display is “Mileage before service”, press

button OK for about 5 seconds to display the mileage before

the next service, then press button 2 to view the mileage before

the next oil change (distance or time remaining before the next

service). When the range approaches its limit, there are several

possible scenarios:

– distance/time remaining less than 900 miles (1,500 km) or

one month: the message “Service due in” is displayed, ac-

companied by the nearest term (distance or time);

– range equal to 0 km/miles or service date reached: the

message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by

warning light

©.

The vehicle requires an oil change as soon as possible.

Service Intervals

Oil change in

30 000 Kms / 24 mo

Service due in

300 Kms / 24 days

Service required

Depending on the vehicle, the mileage before an oil change varies according to the driving style (frequent driving at low speed,

door-to-door journeys, extensive use at idling speed, towing a trailer, etc.). The distance remaining until the next oil change can

therefore decrease more quickly in some cases than the actual distance travelled.

Resetting: to reset the mileage before a service, press and hold button 2 for approximately 10 seconds until the display shows

the range permanently.

NB: if a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the

event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.

1.80

ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (5/5)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected

d) Tyre pressure reset

Refer to the information on the “Tyre pressure

monitoring system” in Section 2.

+ Tyre pressure

No message

memorised

e) Trip log.

Successive display:

– information messages (passenger airbag OFF

etc.);

– operating fault messages (Check injection

system, etc.).

1.81

TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: information messages

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected

« Parking brake on » Indicates that the parking brake has been applied.

« Checking control

functions »

Displayed with the ignition on when the vehicle is running self-diagnostics.

« Turn steering

wheel + START »

Turn the steering wheel slightly whilst pressing the vehicle start button to unlock the steering

column.

« Steering wheel

not locked »

Indicates that the steering column has not been locked.

These can help in the vehicle starting phase, or give information about a selection or a driving status.

Examples of information messages are given in the following pages.

1.82

TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: operating fault messages

These appear with the © warning light and mean that you should drive very carefully to an authorised dealer as

soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.

They disappear when the display selection key is pressed or after several seconds and are stored in the computer log. The

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected

« Clean diesel filter » Indicates the presence of water in the diesel filter; contact an approved Dealer

as soon as possible.

« Check lighting » Indicates a fault in the headlights.

« Check vehicle » Indicates a fault in one of the pedal sensors, battery management system or oil

level sensor.

« Check airbag » Indicates a fault in the restraint system in addition to the seat belts. In the event

of an accident, it is possible that they may not be triggered.

« Check anti-pollution system » Indicates a fault in the vehicle’s particle filter system.

1.83

TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: warning message

These appear with the ® warning light and require you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traf-

fic conditions allow. Stop your engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.

Some examples of warning messages are given below. Note: the messages appear on the display either individually or al-

ternately (when there are several messages to be displayed), and may be accompanied by a warning light and/or a beep.

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected

« Engine failure hazard » Indicates an injection fault, the vehicle’s engine has overheated or there is a

serious engine fault.

“Power steering fault” or “Risk of locked

steering”

Indicates a fault in the steering or a problem with the four-wheel drive.

“Braking system fault” or ”Stop vehicle” Indicates a fault in the braking system. Apply the electronic parking brake ma-

nually and ensure that the vehicle is immobilised using a chock.

« Electric failure DANGER » Indicates a fault in the vehicle battery charging circuit (alternator etc.).

« Puncture » Indicates a puncture on the tyre displayed on the instrument panel.

1.84

VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU

Adjusting the settings

Select the function to modify:

a) unlocking the driver’s door;

b) automatic locking of the doors while

driving;

c) hands-free function;

d) indicator audio volume;

e) internal welcome sound;

f) external welcome;

g) reading lamp in automatic mode;

h) rear windscreen wiping in reverse

gear;

i) configuration of the driving style indi-

cator;

j) Active noise control.

Select “ON” or “OFF” to activate or de-

activate the function.

Depending on the vehicle, this function,

which is integrated in the multifunction

screen 1, allows you to activate/deac-

tivate and adjust some of the vehicle’s

functions.

Accessing the vehicle

settings personalisation

With the vehicle at a standstill, using

the multifunction screen 1, select menu

“Vehicle”, “User settings” to access the

various settings.

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is stationary.

1.85

External temperature

indicator

Special note:

When the exterior temperature is - 3 °C

to + 3 °C, the °C characters flash (sig-

nalling a risk of ice on the road).

The time and/or external tempera-

ture are displayed on the multifunc-

tion screen 1

Refer to the handbook for the equip-

ment.

CLOCK AND EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE

External temperature

indicator

As ice formation is related

to climatic exposure, local

air humidity and temperature, the

external temperature alone is not

sufficient to detect ice.

If the electrical supply is cut (battery

disconnected, broken supply wire,

etc.), the clock will automatically

go back to the right time after a few

minutes once the system is capable

of receiving information GPS.

1.86

STEERING WHEEL/POWER-ASSISTED STEERING

Power-assisted steering

Variable power-assisted steering

The variable power assisted steering

system is equipped with an electronic

control system which alters the level of

assistance to suit the vehicle speed.

Steering is made easier during parking

manoeuvres (for added comfort) while

the force needed to steer increases

progressively as the speed rises (for

enhanced safety at high speeds).

Stop and Start feature

With the engine on standby, power-as-

sisted steering is no longer operational.

It returns to its original state when the

engine is restarted or when the speed

moves above 1 mph or 1 km/h (hill,

slope, etc.).

Adjusting the steering wheel

height and depth

Lower the lever 1 and position the

steering wheel in the required position.

Then, raise the lever fully, beyond the

point of resistance to lock the steering

wheel.

Make sure that the steering wheel is

correctly locked.

For safety reasons, only

adjust the steering wheel

when the vehicle is station-

ary.

Never leave the steering wheel at

full lock while stationary.

Do not switch off the engine

when driving downhill and,

as a general rule, when

driving (the power-assisted

steering and brake cannot operate

normally).

With the engine switched off, or if

there is a system fault, it is still pos-

sible to turn the steering wheel. The

force required will be greater.

Engine on standby - power-

assisted steering is no

longer operational.

NB: power-assisted steering depends

on the mode selected in the “Multi-

Sense” menu (please refer to the infor-

mation in “Multi-Sense” in Section 3).

1.87

Welcome and goodbye function

From the multifunction screen, select

menu “Vehicle”, “User settings”,

“External welcom” and activate or de-

activate the function (ON or OFF).

Depending on the selected choice, the

door mirrors will fold out:

– when the ignition is next switched on

(function deactivated);

– upon detecting the RENAULT card

or upon unlocking the vehicle (func-

tion activated).

Folding door mirrors

The door mirrors automatically fold in

when the vehicle is locked (switch 3 in

position B).

In any case, you can make the door

mirrors fold in (switch 3 in position C) or

fold out (switch 3 in position A).

Automatic mode is then deactivated. To

reactivate it, position switch 3 to B.

REAR-VIEW MIRRORS (1/3)

Door mirrors

Adjustment

Select the door mirror using switch 2,

then use button 1 to adjust it to the de-

sired position.

Heated door mirrors

Mirror de-icing is carried out at the

same time as rear screen de-icing.

Please refer to the information on

“Automatic climate control” in Section 3.

The driver’s door mirror

may have two clearly de-

fined zones. Zone E shows

what can normally be seen

in an ordinary rear view mirror.

Zone D increases rear side visibility.

Objects in the mirror are closer

than they appear.

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is not being

driven.

1.88

Position memory

– Adjust the door mirrors (see previous

paragraphs);

– from the multifunction screen, select

menu “Vehicle”, “Seats”, “Settings”

then “Position” and select “Save”.

The positions of the door mirrors in a

forward gear, reverse and of the front

seats are simultaneously saved.

Rear view mirrors which tilt

in reverse gear

For vehicles equipped with the driver’s

seat with position memory, you can

enter a specific setting for the door mir-

rors when reversing and store the po-

sition.

With the vehicle at a standstill and re-

verse gear engaged, select the door

mirror using switch 2 then, with button 1,

adjust it to the required position.

REAR-VIEW MIRRORS (2/3)

Recalling the memorised

position

From the multifunction screen, select

menu “Vehicle”, “Seats”, “Settings” then

“Position” and select “Recall”.

The positions of the door mirrors in

forward gear, reverse and of the front

seats are recalled.

Returning to the driving position

Moving from reverse gear to a forward

gear is done:

– approximately 9 seconds after re-

verse gear has been disengaged

when the speed is lower than 6 mph

(10 km/h);

– forward gear engaged when the

speed is greater than 6 mph

(10 km/h);

– when the engine is stopped;

– when switch 2 is in neutral position.

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is not being

driven.

1.89

Interior rear view mirror

The rear-view mirror 4 automati-

cally darkens when you are being fol-

lowed by a vehicle using main beam

headlights or in very bright lighting.

REAR-VIEW MIRRORS (3/3)

Special feature:

When the rear-view mirror has been

manually deployed or folded back, it is

possible to reset it to a usage position.

To do this, position the switch 3 to C.

A mechanical noise from the rear-view

mirror unit will be heard.

If it is not the case, place switch 3 to A

and then place switch 3 to C until the

mechanical noise of the rear-view

mirror is heard.

Information regarding the activation

and deactivation of the front pas-

senger airbag is displayed on the in-

terior rear-view mirror (please refer

to information in “Child safety: front

passenger airbag deactivation/acti-

vation” in Section 1).

1.90

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS

Horn

Press the steering wheel boss A to ac-

tivate the horn.

Headlight flasher

Pull stalk 1 towards you to flash the

headlights.

Hazard warning lights

Press switch 2. This switch ac-

tivates all four direction indicators and

the side indicator lights simultaneously.

It must only be used in an emergency to

warn drivers of other vehicles that you

have had to stop in an area where stop-

ping is prohibited or unexpected or that

you are obliged to drive under special

conditions.

Depending on the vehicle, the hazard

warning lights may come on automati-

cally under heavy deceleration. You can

switch them off by pressing switch 2.

Direction indicators

Move stalk 1 parallel to the steering

wheel and in the direction you are going

to turn it.

One-touch mode

When driving, it is possible that the

steering wheel may not be turned suf-

ficiently to return the stalk automatically

to its starting position.

In this case, briefly turn stalk 1 to the in-

termediate position, then release it: the

stalk returns to its original point and the

indicator light flashes three times.

1.91

Main beam headlights

With the dipped beam

headlights lit, push stalk 1. This indica-

tor light on the instrument panel comes

on.

To return to the dipped headlight posi-

tion, pull the stalk 1 towards you again.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (1/5)

Side lights

Turn ring 3 until the symbol is

opposite mark 2. This indicator light on

the instrument panel comes on.

Dipped beam

headlights

Manual operation

Turn ring 3 until the symbol is opposite

mark 2. This indicator light on the in-

strument panel comes on.

Automatic operation

Turn ring 3 until the AUTO symbol is op-

posite mark 2: with the engine running,

the dipped beam headlights switch on

or off automatically depending on the

brightness of the light outside, without

any action on stalk 1.

Before driving at night:

check that the electrical

equipment is operating cor-

rectly. As a general precau-

tion, check that the lights are not

obscured (by dirt, mud, snow or ob-

jects being transported).

1.92



Automatic main beam

headlights

Depending on the vehicle, this system

switches the main beam headlights on

and off automatically. The function uses

a camera located behind the interior

rear-view mirror to detect vehicles that

are following and coming in the oppo-

site direction.

The main beam headlights come on au-

tomatically if:

– exterior light is weak;

– no other vehicles or lighting are de-

tected;

– the vehicle speed is above approxi-

mately 30 mph (45 km/h).

If any of the above conditions are not

fulfilled, the system switches to dipped

beam headlights.

The “automatic main beam

headlights” system should

under no circumstances be

used to replace driver atten-

tion and responsibility with regard

to vehicle lighting and adapting to

light, visibility and traffic conditions.

Using the portable naviga-

tion system at night in the

windscreen area below the

camera may disturb the op-

eration of the “automatic main beam

headlights” system (risk of reflection

on the windscreen).

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (2/5)

The system may encounter difficul-

ties under certain conditions, inclu-

ding:

– extreme weather conditions (rain,

snow, fog, etc.);

– obstruction in front of the wind-

screen or camera;

– when a following or oncoming ve-

hicle has weak or hidden lighting;

– incorrect settings for the front

headlights;

– reflective systems;

– ...

Activation

Turn ring 3 until the AUTO symbol is op-

posite mark 2.

Push stalk 1 to activate the main beam

headlights. The warning light



comes on on the instrument panel.

Deactivation

– Push stalk 1 again;

– or turn ring 3 to a position other than

AUTO ;

– or, from the multifunction screen:

select menu “Vehicle”, “Driving as-

sistance”, “Automatic high beams”

then choose “OFF”.

Warning light

 goes out on the

instrument panel.

1.93

Operating faults

When the message “Check auto li-

ghting” appears on the instrument

panel, the system is deactivated.

Consult an approved dealer.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (3/5)

Switching off the lights

There are two possibilities:

– manually, move ring 3 to position 0;

– automatically, the lights will go out

when the engine is switched off, the

driver’s door is opened or the vehicle

is locked. In this case, the next time

the engine is started the lights will be

switched back on according to the

position of the ring 3.

Lights-on reminder buzzer

If the lights are on after the engine is

switched off, a warning beep sounds

when the driver’s door is opened to

warn you that the lights are still on.

Adjusting the headlight beam

height

The headlight adjustment is automatic,

based on the vehicle load.

Daytime running lights

function

The daytime running lights come on

automatically (at the front only) with no

action on stalk 1 at the time of starting

engine, and they go off once the engine

is switched off.

Operating faults

When the message “Check lighting”

with warning light

and warning light

k flashes on the

instrument panel, this indicates that

there is a lighting fault.

Consult an approved dealer.

1.94

“See-me-home lighting”

function

This function allows you to briefly switch

on the dipped beam headlights (to pro-

vide light when opening a gate, etc.).

With the engine and lights off and

ring 3 in position 0 or AUTO, pull

stalk 1 towards you: the dipped beam

headlights come on for approximately

thirty seconds. To increase this dura-

tion, you may pull the stalk up to four

times (total time restricted to two mi-

nutes). The message “Follow-me home

for _ _ _” along with the time the lights

will be on for is displayed on the instru-

ment panel to confirm this action. You

can then lock your vehicle.

To switch off the lights before they go

out automatically, turn ring 3 to any po-

sition, then return it to the AUTO posi-

tion .

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (4/5)

Welcome and goodbye

function

(depending on the vehicle)

Once the function is activated, the lights

come on automatically upon detecting

the Renault card or when the vehicle is

unlocked.

They switch off automatically:

– approximately one minute after li-

ghting up;

– when starting the engine based on

the position of the lighting stalk;

– upon locking the vehicle.

Welcome lighting under the

door mirrors

With the function activated, the lights

located under the door mirrors come

on automatically upon detection of the

RENAULT card, upon unlocking the

vehicle or when opening a door.

They switch off automatically:

– approximately one minute after li-

ghting up;

– upon starting the engine;

– upon locking the vehicle.

Function activation/

deactivation

Using the multifunction screen, select

menu “Vehicle”, “User settings” then

“External welcom”. Choose “ON” or

“OFF” to activate or deactivate the

function.

1.95

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (5/5)

Rear fog lights

Turn centre ring 4 on the stalk

until the symbol faces mark 2, then re-

lease it.

Operation of the fog lights depends on

the exterior lighting selected, and an in-

dicator light will light up on the instru-

ment panel.

Do not forget to switch off the fog lights

when they are no longer needed, to

avoid inconveniencing other road

users.

Switching off the lights

Turn ring 4 again until mark 2 is oppo-

site the symbol for the fog light that you

wish to switch off. The corresponding

indicator light on the instrument panel

goes out.

The rear fog lights switch off when the

exterior lights are switched off.

When driving in fog or snow, or

when transporting objects which are

higher than the roof, the headlights

do not come on automatically.

Switching on the fog lights remains

the responsibility of the driver: the

indicator lights on the instrument

panel inform you whether the fog

lights are lit (indicator light on) or not

(indicator light not on).

1.96

Special note

When driving the vehicle, the wiping

speed slows down whenever the vehi-

cle stops. For example, fast wiping

speed will slow to normal wiping speed.

As soon as the vehicle moves off,

wiping will return to the speed originally

selected.

If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and

cancels the automatic function.

Vehicle fitted with intermittent

windscreen wipers

A single sweep

A short push will trigger one sweep

of the wipers.

B stop

C intermittent wiping

The wipers will pause for seve-

ral seconds between sweeps. It

is possible to change the time

between sweeps by turning ring 2.

D slow continuous wiping

E fast continuous wiping

Positions A, C and D are accessible

with the ignition on. Position E is

accessible only when the engine is

running.

WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (1/6)

Check the condition of the wiper

blades. You are responsible for their

service life:

– they must remain clean: clean

the blades, windscreen and

rear screen regularly with soapy

water;

– do not use them when the winds-

creen or rear screen are dry;

– free them from the windscreen or

rear screen when they have not

been used for a long time.

In all cases, replace them as soon

as they begin to lose efficiency: ap-

proximately once a year.

Before using the rear wiper, check

that no object obstructs the travel of

the blade.

Do not use the wiper arm to open or

close the tailgate.

1.97

Vehicle fitted with front

windscreen wiper rain sensor

The rain sensor is located on the winds-

creen, in front of the interior rear-view

mirror.

A single sweep

A short push will trigger one sweep

of the wipers.

B stop

When activating automatic wiping

or when increasing sensitivity, one

sweep of the blades is performed.

Note:

– the rain sensor is only intended

as a driving aid. In the event of re-

duced visibility, the driver should

manually activate the wipers. In

foggy weather or during snow-

falls, wiping is not automatically

triggered and remains under the

driver’s control;

– in the event of temperatures

below zero, automatic wiping is

not activated when the vehicle

is started. It is automatically acti-

vated as soon as the vehicle ex-

ceeds a certain speed (approxi-

mately 5 mph (8 km/h));

– do not activate automatic wiping

in dry weather;

– fully de-ice the windscreen before

activating automatic wiping.

WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (2/6)

C automatic wiper function

When this position is selected,

the system detects water on the

windscreen and triggers the wipers

at a suitable wiping speed. It is

possible to change the triggering

threshold and the time sweeps by

turning ring 2:

– F : minimum sensitivity

– G : maximum sensitivity

The higher the sensitivity, the quic-

ker the wipers will react and the

faster the wipe.

1.98

D slow continuous wiping

E fast continuous wiping

Positions A and D are accessible

with the ignition on. Positions B

and E are accessible only with the

engine running.

Operating fault

In the event of a malfunction of the

automatic wiping, the wiper is set to

intermittent wiping. Contact an au-

thorised dealer.

The operation of the rain sensor can

be disturbed in the event of:

– damaged wiper blades; a screen

of water or traces left by a blade in

the sensor’s detection zone may

increase the response time of the

automatic wiper, or increase the

wiping frequency;

– a windscreen with any chip or

crack level with the sensor, or a

windscreen covered in dust, dirt,

insects, ice, the use of washing

wax and water-repellent chemi-

cals; the automatic wiping will

be less sensitive, or even unres-

ponsive.

WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (3/6)

Special note

When driving the vehicle, the wiping

speed slows down whenever the vehi-

cle stops. For example, fast wiping

speed will slow to normal wiping speed.

As soon as the vehicle moves off,

wiping will return to the speed originally

selected.

If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and

cancels the automatic function.

Precautions

– In the event of ice, check whether the

blades are stuck to the windscreen

before operating the wiping mecha-

nism. If you activate the wipers while

the blades are stuck down with ice,

you may risk damaging both the

blade and the wiper motor.

– Do not activate the wipers on a dry

screen. This will lead to the prema-

ture wear or damage to the blades.

1.99

Before any action involving

the windscreen (washing

the vehicle, de-icing,

cleaning the windscreen,

etc.) return stalk 1 to position B

(stop).

Risk of injury and/or damage.

In the event of obstacles present

on the windscreen (dirt, snow, ice,

etc.), clean the windscreen (inclu-

ding the central area located behind

the interior rear-view mirror) and

the rear screen before starting the

wipers (risk of motor overheating).

If an object is preventing a blade

from moving, it may stop functio-

ning. Remove the obstacle and

reactivate the wiper using the wiper

stalk.

WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (4/6)

Note:

Once the wipers have been switched

off, at least 1 minute after locking the

vehicle, it is possible to manually move

the blades. Do not force the blade arms

to move. This may risk damage to the

wiper motor, the arms and the blades.

After your intervention, to reposition the

blades correctly, make sure the blades

are resting on the windscreen, switch

on the ignition and activate the wiper

control.

The blade on the driver’s side must

always be above the passenger blade.

If this is not the case, a quick sweep of

the windscreen wipers should be per-

formed once the vehicle is travelling at

over 4 mph (7 km/h).

Specific front wiper position

(service position)

This position enables the blades to be

lifted to remove them from the winds-

creen.

This can be useful:

– to clean the blades;

– to release the blades from the winds-

creen in winter;

– to replace the blades (please refer

to the information on the “Wiper

blades” in Section 5).

With the ignition on and the engine off,

lower the windscreen wiper stalk fully

(fast continuous wipe position). The

wiper arms stop in a position away from

the bonnet.

To return the blades to position, make

sure they have been placed on the

windscreen, then move the stalk to po-

sition B (stop) with the ignition on.

Before switching on the ignition,

place the wipers on the windscreen.

Otherwise, there may a risk of damage

to the bonnet or the wipers when they

are switched on.

1.100

Note:

In temperatures below zero, the washer

liquid risks freezing to the windscreen,

thereby reducing visibility. Heat the

windscreen using the demister control

before cleaning.

Windscreen washer

With the ignition on, pull stalk 1 then

release.

A brief pull will trigger a single sweep

of the wipers, in addition to the winds-

creen washer.

A longer pull will trigger three sweeps

of the wipers followed, a few seconds

later, by a fourth, in addition to the

windscreen washer.

When working in the engine

compartment, ensure that

the windscreen wiper stalk

is in position B (stop).

Risk of injury.

WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (5/6)

1.101

Note:

To ensure the headlight washers ope-

rate correctly in winter, remove snow

from the jet trims and de-ice the jet

trims using an aerosol de-icer.

You are recommended to regularly

remove dirt encrusted on the headlight

glass.

When the minimum windscreen washer

fluid level is reached, the headlight

washer system may be deprimed.

Fill the windscreen washer fluid and

then activate the windscreen washer,

with the engine running, to reprime

the system.

WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (6/6)

Headlight washers

Headlights on

On equipped vehicles, hold stalk 1

pulled towards you for about 2 seconds

- the headlight washers and winds-

creen washers will be activated at the

same time.

The headlight washers are also activa-

ted after three prolonged movements

on the front windscreen washer control.

When working in the engine

compartment, ensure that

the windscreen wiper stalk

is in position B (stop).

Risk of injury.

1.102

REAR SCREEN WASH/WIPE (1/2)

Check the condition of the wiper

blades. You are responsible for their

service life:

– they must remain clean: clean

the blades, windscreen and

rear screen regularly with soapy

water;

– do not use them when the winds-

creen or rear screen are dry;

– free them from the windscreen or

rear screen when they have not

been used for a long time.

In all cases, replace them as soon

as they begin to lose efficiency: ap-

proximately once a year.

Before using the rear wiper, check

that no object obstructs the travel of

the blade.

Do not use the wiper arm to open or

close the tailgate.

Rear screen wiper

With the ignition on, turn ring 3

on stalk 1 to align the symbol with

mark 2.

– stop;

– intermittent wiping.

The wipers will pause for several

seconds between sweeps. Wiping

frequency varies with vehicle

speed;

– slow continuous wiping.

To stop the operation, pivot ring 3 again.

Note:

When washing using a roller type car

wash, return the ring 3 on the stalk 1

to the stop position to deactivate auto-

matic wiping.

Follow usage recommendations.

Before any action involving

the rear screen (washing

the vehicle, de-icing, clean-

ing, etc.) return stalk 1 to

the stop position.

Risk of injury and/or damage.

1.103

Activation/deactivation of the rear

screen wiper

Engaging reverse gear triggers inter-

mittent wiping (if the front wipers are in

operation). If your vehicle is fitted with

a vehicle settings customisation menu,

you can opt to activate or deactivate

this function. To do this, refer to the in-

formation on the “Vehicle settings cus-

tomisation menu” in Section 1; “Rear

wiping in reverse gear”.

For vehicles not fitted with a settings

customisation menu, you can have this

function deactivated by an authorised

dealer.

REAR SCREEN WASH/WIPE (2/2)

Rear screen wash/wipe

With the ignition on, push and

hold stalk 1, then release.

A longer action will trigger three sweeps

of the wipers followed, a few seconds

later, by a fourth, in addition to the wind-

screen washer.

In the event of obstacles present on the

rear window (dirt, snow, etc.), the wiper

will try to sweep away all the obstacles.

If an obstacle prevents the blade from

moving, it can be stopped. Remove the

obstacle, wait for around 30 seconds

and reactivate the wiper using the wiper

stalk.

Precautions

– In the event of ice, check whether

the blades are stuck to the wind-

screen before operating the wiping

mechanism. If you activate the wiper

while the blade is blocked by ice, you

risk damaging both the blade and the

wiping motor.

– Do not activate the wipers on a dry

screen. This will lead to the prema-

ture wear or damage to the blades.

1.104

FUEL TANK (1/3)

Useable fuel tank capacity:

approx. 58 litres.

With the vehicle unlocked, to open

cover 1, press area A then release. The

cover 1 opens.

Valve 2 is integrated into the filler pipe.

For details on filling the fuel tank, refer

to the information on “Filling with fuel”.

To close it, press on the fuel filler flap by

hand, as far as it will go.

Fuel grade

Use a high-grade fuel that complies

with the legislation in force in each

country and which must comply with

the specifications given on the label

on the cover 1. Please refer to the in-

formation on “Engine specifications” in

Section 6.

Never press valve 2 with

your fingers.

Do not wash the filler

area with a high-pressure

washer.

Do not mix even small

amounts of petrol (un-

leaded or E85) with diesel.

Do not use ethanol-based

fuel if your vehicle is not compatible

with this fuel.

Do not add additive to the fuel –

otherwise you risk damaging the

engine.

Diesel versions

Only use diesel fuel which complies

with the information on the label located

inside the cover 1.

Petrol versions

It is essential to use unleaded petrol.

The octane rating (RON) must comply

with the information given on the label

on the cover 1. Refer to Section 6 for

information on “Engine specifications”.

1.105

FUEL TANK (2/3)

Filling with fuel

Insert the nozzle to open the valve 2

and insert it fully before turning it on to

fill the fuel tank (risk of splashing).

Keep the nozzle in this position

throughout the entire filling operation.

When the pump cuts out automatically

at the end of the filling procedure, a

maximum of two further filling attempts

may be made, as there must be suffi-

cient space in the fuel tank to allow for

expansion.

Make sure that no water enters the fuel

tank during filling. The valve 2 and its

surround must remain clean.

Vehicle fitted with the Stop and

Start function

To fill up with fuel, the engine must

be stopped (and not on standby):

stop the engine by pressing the

engine stop button 3 (please refer

to the information on “Starting and

Stopping the engine” in Section 2).

Petrol versions

Using leaded petrol will damage the

antipollution system and may lead to a

loss of warranty.

To ensure that the fuel tank is not filled

with leaded petrol, the fuel tank filler

neck consists of a restrictor fitted with

a safety system which only allows

a nozzle for unleaded petrol to be

used (at the pump).

1.106

Persistent smell of

fuel

If you notice a persistent

smell of fuel you should:

– stop the vehicle as soon as traf-

fic conditions allow and switch off

the ignition;

– switch on the hazard warning

lights and ask your passengers

to leave the vehicle and to keep

away from traffic;

– contact an approved Dealer.

Running out of fuel on diesel

versions

With the card RENAULT in the pas-

senger compartment, press the start

button 3 without pressing any of the

pedals. Wait a few minutes before start-

ing. This will enable the fuel circuit to

be primed. If the engine does not start,

repeat the procedure.

If the engine does not start after several

attempts, please contact an authorised

dealer.

No modifications what-

soever are permitted on

any part of the fuel supply

system (electronic units,

wiring, fuel circuit, injectors, pro-

tective covers, etc.) as this may be

dangerous (unless undertaken by

qualified Network personnel).

FUEL TANK (3/3)

2.1

Section 2: Driving

(Advice on use relating to fuel economy and the environment)

Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2

Starting - Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3

Stop and Start Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6

Special features of petrol versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10

Special features of diesel versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11

Gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12

Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13

Driving advice, Eco-driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16

Maintenance and antipollution advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22

Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23

Driver correction devices/aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26

Lane departure warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38

Blind spot warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41

Safe distance alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.46

Speeding alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52

Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56

Parking distance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63

Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67

Assisted parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.69

Piloted dampened suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73

Automatic gearbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74

2.2

RUNNING IN

Petrol version

Up to 600 miles (1 000 km), do not

exceed 78 mph (130 km/h) in top gear

or 3,000 to 3,500 rpm.

You may only expect top performance

from your vehicle after approximately

1,800 miles (3 000 km).

Service interval: refer to the

Maintenance Document for your vehi-

cle.

Diesel version

For the first 900 miles (1 500 km), do

not exceed 2,500 rpm. After complet-

ing this mileage you may drive faster,

however, it is only after approximately

3600 miles (6 000 km) that you may

reasonably expect full performance.

During the running in period, do not ac-

celerate hard while the engine is still

cold and do not let the engine over-rev.

Service interval: refer to the

Maintenance Document for your vehi-

cle.

2.3

STARTING/STOPPING THE ENGINE (1/3)

The RENAULT card must be inserted in

detection zone 1.

To start:

– vehicles with an automatic gearbox,

place the lever in position P, depress

the brake pedal and press button 2;

– vehicles with a manual gearbox,

depress the brake or clutch pedal

and press the button 2. If a gear is

engaged, the vehicle may only be

started by depressing the clutch

pedal.

“Hands-free” starting with

the tailgate open

In this case, the RENAULT card should

not be located in the boot, to avoid any

risk of loss.

Special features

– If one of starting conditions is not ap-

plied, the message “Press brake +

START” or “Press clutch + START”

or “Select P” is displayed on the in-

strument panel;

– in some cases, it will be necessary to

move the steering wheel while press-

ing start button 1 to assist in unlock-

ing the steering column. A message

on the instrument panel “Turn steer-

ing wheel + START” warns of this.

2.4

STARTING/STOPPING THE ENGINE (2/3)

Depress the brake or clutch pedal, then

place the RENAULT 3 card (logo side)

in contact with the start button 2 for

around 2 seconds. Press the 2 button

to start the vehicle. The message goes

out.

Accessories function

(switching on the ignition)

Once you have gained access to your

vehicle, you may use some of its func-

tions (radio, navigation, wipers, etc.).

To use the other functions, with the

RENAULT card in the passenger com-

partment, press button 2 without press-

ing the pedals.

Operating faults

In certain cases, the RENAULT “hands-

free” card may not work:

– when the RENAULT card battery is

drained, etc.;

– near to appliances operating on the

same frequency as the card (moni-

tor, mobile phone, video game, etc.);

– vehicle located in a high electromag-

netic radiation zone.

The message “Place card close to

START button” appears on the instru-

ment panel.

Driver’s responsibility

Never leave an animal,

child or adult who is not

self-sufficient alone in your

vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the

electric windows or locking the

doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,

please remember that the tempera-

ture inside the passenger compart-

ment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS

INJURY.

2.5

STARTING/STOPPING THE ENGINE (3/3)

If the RENAULT card is no longer in the

passenger compartment when you try

to switch the engine off, the message

“No keycard Press and hold” appears

on the instrument panel: press the

button 2 for longer than two seconds.

If the card is no longer in the passen-

ger compartment, make sure you can

retrieve it before pressing and holding

the button. Without the card RENAULT

, you will not be able to start.

With the engine switched off, any ac-

cessories being used (radio, etc.) will

continue to function for approximately

10 minutes.

When the driver’s door is opened, the

accessories stop working.

Conditions for stopping the

engine

With the vehicle at a standstill, and the

RENAULT card in the vehicle, press

button 2: the engine will stop. The steer-

ing column is locked when the driver’s

door is opened or the vehicle is locked.

For vehicles with an automatic gear-

box, park position P is activated auto-

matically.

When you leave your vehi-

cle, especially if you have

your RENAULT card with

you, check that the engine

is completely switched off.

Driver’s responsibility

Never leave an animal,

child or adult who is not

self-sufficient alone in your

vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the

electric windows or locking the

doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,

please remember that the tempera-

ture inside the passenger compart-

ment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS

INJURY.

Never switch off the ignition before

the vehicle has stopped completely.

Once the engine has stopped, the

brake servo, power-assisted steer-

ing, etc. and the passive safety de-

vices such as airbags and preten-

sioners will no longer operate.

2.6

For vehicles equipped with manual

gearboxes:

– the gearbox is in neutral;

and

– The clutch pedal is released.

If the warning light

 flashes,

this means that the clutch pedal is

not sufficiently released;

and

– the vehicle speed is less than ap-

proximately 7 mph (3 km/h).

For all vehicles:

The warning light

 on the instru-

ment panel is lit when the engine is on

standby.

The vehicle equipment remain opera-

tional while the engine is stopped.

STOP AND START FUNCTION (1/4)

This system enables a reduced fuel

consumption and lower greenhouse

gas emissions. The system is acti-

vated automatically when the vehicle is

started. While driving, the system stops

the engine (standby) when the vehicle

is at a standstill (traffic jam, traffic lights,

etc).

Conditions for engine

standby

The vehicle has set off from where it

was parked;

For vehicles equipped with auto-

matic gearboxes:

– the gearbox is in position D or N;

and

– the brake pedal is depressed (suffi-

ciently hard);

and

– the accelerator pedal is not de-

pressed;

and

– the speed is zero for around

1 second.

The engine remains on standby if posi-

tion P is selected, or if position N is se-

lected with the handbrake engaged and

the brake pedal released.

If the engine is put in

standby, the electronic

parking brake (depending

on the vehicle) is not ap-

plied automatically.

Engine on standby - braking

assistance is no longer op-

erational.

Before getting out of the

vehicle, you must switch

off the ignition by pressing

the engine stop (please see

“Starting, stopping the engine”).

If the engine stalls while the system

is in operation, pressing the clutch

pedal right down will start it again.

Engine on standby - power-

assisted steering is no

longer operational.

Keep your vehicle station-

ary when the engine is

on standby (shown by the

warning light

 on the

instrument panel).

2.7

Conditions for coming out of

engine standby

For vehicles equipped with auto-

matic gearboxes:

– the brake pedal is released in gear

position D;

– the brake pedal is released in gear

position N with the handbrake off;

– the brake pedal is pressed again in

gear position P or N engaged with

the handbrake applied;

– the vehicle is in gear position R;

– the accelerator pedal is depressed.

For vehicles equipped with manual

gearboxes:

– the gearbox is in neutral and the

clutch pedal is slightly depressed;

– the engine is in gear and the clutch

pedal is pressed right down.

To fill up with fuel, the engine must

be stopped (and not on standby):

always stop the engine by pressing

the engine stop button (please see

“Starting, stopping the engine)”.

STOP AND START FUNCTION (2/4)

Preventing the engine from

standing by

In certain situations, such as negotiat-

ing a crossroads for instance, it is pos-

sible to keep the engine running so as

to be ready to move off quickly.

For vehicles equipped with auto-

matic gearboxes:

Keep the vehicle stationary without

pressing too hard on the brake pedal

For vehicles equipped with manual

gearboxes:

Keep the clutch pedal pressed right

down

2.8

STOP AND START FUNCTION (3/4)

Conditions preventing the

standby of the engine

Certain conditions prevent the system

from using the engine standby function,

including when:

– reverse gear is engaged;

– the bonnet is not locked;

– the driver’s door is not closed;

– the driver’s seatbelt is not fastened;

– the outdoor temperature is too low or

too high (less than around 0 °C or

higher than around 30 °C);

– the battery is not sufficiently charged;

– the difference between the vehicle

interior temperature and the auto-

matic climate control instruction is

too high;

– parking distance control is in opera-

tion;

– for vehicles with automatic gear-

boxes, the gradient is steeper than

approximately 12%;

– the “Clear View” function is activated

(please see “Automatic Climate

Control” in Section 3);

– the engine temperature is too low;

– the emission control system is being

regenerated;

– ...

Warning light

 is displayed on the

instrument panel. This notifies you that

engine standby is not available.

Deactivate the Stop and

Start function when per-

forming any operations in

the engine compartment.

Special case for vehicles with

a RENAULT card

With the engine on standby (traffic jam,

traffic lights, etc.), if the driver unfas-

tens the seat belt and opens the driv-

er’s door, or gets out of the seat, the

ignition is switched off.

The assisted parking brake is applied

automatically.

To restart and reactivate the Stop and

Start system, press the start button

(please see “Starting, stopping the

engine” in Section 2).

2.9

STOP AND START FUNCTION (4/4)

Special feature of the automatic

engine re-start

Under certain conditions, the engine

can restart on its own in order to guar-

antee your safety and comfort.

This can occur especially when:

– the outdoor temperature is too low or

too high (less than around 0 °C or

higher than around 30 °C);

– the “Clear View” function is activated

(please see “Automatic Climate

Control” in Section 3);

– the battery is not sufficiently charged;

– the vehicle speed is above 3 mph

(5 km/h) (downhill slope, etc.);

– repeated pressing on the brake

pedal or braking system require-

ment;

– ...

Deactivating, activating the

function

Press switch 1 to deactivate the func-

tion. The message “Stop & Start deac-

tivated” will appear on the instrument

panel and the integrated warning light 2

on the switch will light up.

Pressing again will reactivate the

system. The message “Stop & Start ac-

tivated” will appear on the instrument

panel and the integrated warning light 2

on switch 1 will go out.

Note: With the engine on standby,

press switch 1 to automatically re-

start the engine.

The system reactivates automati-

cally each time the vehicle is started

using the start button (please refer

to “Starting, stopping the engine” in

Section 2).

Operating faults

When the message “Check Stop &

Start” appears on the instrument panel

and the integrated warning light 2 lights

up on the switch 1, the system is deac-

tivated.

Please consult an authorised dealer.

Before getting out of the

vehicle, you must switch

off the ignition by pressing

the engine stop (please see

“Starting, stopping the engine”).

2.10

SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS

Do not park the vehicle or

run the engine in locations

where combustible sub-

stances or materials such

as grass or leaves can come into

contact with the hot exhaust system.

The following operating conditions

should be avoided:

– driving for long periods when the low

fuel level warning light is lit;

– using leaded petrol;

– using fuel or lubrication additives

which are not approved.

Or operating faults such as:

– faulty ignition, running out of fuel or

disconnected spark plugs resulting

in the engine misfiring or cutting out

when driving;

– loss of power,

may cause the catalytic converter to

overheat, reducing its efficiency which

may irreparably damage it and cause

heat damage to the vehicle.

If you notice any of the above operating

faults, have the necessary repairs car-

ried out as soon as possible by an ap-

proved dealer.

These faults may be avoided by regu-

larly taking your vehicle to an approved

Dealer at the intervals specified in the

Maintenance Document.

Starting problems

To avoid damaging the catalytic con-

verter, do not keep trying to start the

engine (using the start button, or by

pushing or towing the vehicle) without

having identified and corrected the

cause of the fault.

2.11

SPECIAL FEATURES OF DIESEL VERSIONS

Diesel engine speed

Diesel engines are fitted with injection

equipment which prevents the engine

speed being exceeded irrespective of

the gear selected.

If the message “Check anti-pollution

system” is displayed along with warning

lights

Ä and ©, consult an au-

thorised dealer immediately.

When driving, depending on the fuel

grade used, it is possible that white

smoke may be emitted.

This is due to the exhaust particle filter

being cleaned automatically, and does

not affect the way the vehicle runs.

Do not park the vehicle or

run the engine in locations

where combustible subs-

tances or materials such

as grass or leaves can come into

contact with the hot exhaust system.

Precautions to be taken in

winter

To avoid any faults in icy weather:

– ensure that the battery is always fully

charged,

– always keep the diesel tank re-

latively full to avoid water vapour

condensing in it and accumulating at

the bottom of the tank.

2.12

GEAR LEVER

Selecting reverse gear

Vehicles with manual gearbox: follow

the grid drawn on knob 1, and depend-

ing on the vehicle, lift ring against the

gear lever knob to select reverse.

Vehicle with automatic gearbox: refer

to the information on the “Automatic

gearbox” in Section 2.

The reversing lights will come on as

soon as reverse gear is selected with

the ignition on.

An impact to the under-

side of the vehicle while

manoeuvring (e.g.: strik-

ing a post, raised kerb or

other street furniture) may result in

damage to the vehicle (e.g.: defor-

mation of the rear axle).

To avoid any risk of accident, have

your vehicle checked by an ap-

proved Dealer.

2.13

ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (1/3)

Note:

To indicate that the electronic parking

brake is released, a beep sounds and

the message “Apply parking brake” ap-

pears on the instrument panel:

– with the engine running: when the

driver’s door is opened;

– with the engine switched off (eg.

when the engine stalls): when a front

door is opened.

In this case, pull and release switch 2 to

apply the assisted parking brake.

Automatic releasing of the

electronic parking brake

The brake will be released as soon as

the vehicle starts and accelerates.

Automatic operation

The assisted parking brake can be

used to immobilise the vehicle when

the engine is stopped by pressing

button 1.

In all other cases:

– engine standby for vehicles fitted

with Stop and Start function,

– engine has stalled etc.,

the assisted parking brake is not ap-

plied automatically. Manual mode must

be used.

Please refer to «Starting/stopping the

engine» and «Stop and Start function"

in Section 2.

For certain country-specific model ver-

sions, the automatic brake application

function is not activated. Refer to the in-

formation on “Manual operation”.

To confirm that the electronic parking

brake is applied, the message “Parking

brake on” and warning light

}

on the instrument panel and warning

light 3 on the switch 2 light up.

After the engine is switched off, indi-

cator light 3 goes out several minutes

after the electronic parking brake has

been applied and indicator light

}

goes out when the vehicle is locked.

Before leaving the vehi-

cle, check that the assisted

parking brake is fully ap-

plied. Warning light 3 on

switch 2 and warning light

}

on the instrument panel light up to

show that the parking brake is ap-

plied but go out when the doors are

locked.

2.14

ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (2/3)

Special cases

To park on a slope or while towing a

trailer, for example, pull switch 2 for

a few seconds to gain the maximum

braking.

To park the vehicle without applying the

electronic parking brake (if there is a

risk of freezing, for example):

– with the engine running, while simul-

taneously keeping the brake pedal

and switch 2 depressed, switch off

the engine by pressing the engine

Start/Stop button 1;

– with a gear or position P engaged,

release the brake pedal and the

switch 2.

For vehicles fitted with a Stop and Start

function, with the engine on standby,

the electronic parking brake is automat-

ically activated if the driver unfastens

their seat belt or opens the driver’s door

or gets out of their seat.

Brief stop

To manually activate the electronic

parking brake, (when stopping at a red

light, or stopping when the engine is

running, etc.): pull and release switch 2.

The brake is released as soon as the

vehicle is started up again.

Manual operation

You can control the electronic parking

brake manually.

Applying the electronic parking

brake

Pull switch 2. Warning light 3 and warn-

ing light

} on the instrument panel

light up.

Releasing the electronic parking

brake

With the ignition on, depress the brake

pedal then press switch 2: warning

light 3 and warning light

} go out.

Special feature relating to the Stop and Start function: in the event of un-

fastening the driver’s seat belt before the engine goes to standby using

the Stop and Start function, make sure the parking brake is engaged:

warning light

} will come on the instrument panel to confirm this.

Risk of loss of immobilisation.

2.15

Operating faults

– If there is a fault, the © warning

light illuminates on the instrument

panel accompanied by the “Check

parking brake” message and, in

some cases, the

} warning

light.

Please contact an authorised dealer

as soon as possible.

– If there is an assisted parking brake

fault, the warning light

® comes

on, along with the message “Braking

system fault”, a beep and, in some

cases, the warning light

This means that you must stop as

soon as traffic conditions allow.

Versions with an automatic

gearbox

For safety reasons, automatic release

is deactivated when the driver’s door

is open or not shut properly and the

engine is running (in order to prevent

the vehicle from moving without the

driver). The “Release parking brake

manually” message appears on the

instrument panel when the driver de-

presses the accelerator.

ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (3/3)

It is therefore essential to

immobilise the vehicle by

engaging first gear (manual

gearbox) or position P (au-

tomatic gearbox). If the slope re-

quires it, chock the vehicle.

Never leave your vehicle

without moving the selec-

tor lever to position P or N.

This is because when the

vehicle is stationary with the engine

running and a gear engaged, the

vehicle may begin to move if you

accelerate.

There is a risk of accidents.

If no lights or sounds are

apparent, this indicates

a fault in the instrument

panel. This indicates that

it is essential to stop immediately

(as soon as traffic conditions allow).

Ensure that the vehicle is correctly

immobilised and contact an appro-

ved Dealer.

In the event of message

“Electric failure DANGER”

or “Check battery”, manu-

ally activate the electronic

parking brake by pulling switch 2 (or

position the gear lever in P for au-

tomatic gearboxes) before stopping

the engine.

Risk of loss of immobilisation of the

vehicle.

Contact an authorised dealer.

2.16

DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (1/5)

Gear change indicator 2

Depending on the vehicle, to obtain op-

timum consumption levels, a warning

light on the instrument panel lets you

know the best time to move up or down

a gear:

Š move up a gear;

‰ move down a gear.

If you regularly follow this indicator, you

will reduce your vehicle’s fuel consump-

tion.

Fuel consumption is accredited in ac-

cordance with a standard regulatory

method. Identical for all manufactur-

ers, this enables vehicles to be com-

pared with one another. Consumption

in real time depends on vehicle usage

conditions, the equipment fitted and the

user’s driving style. To optimise fuel

consumption, please refer to the follow-

ing advice.

Depending on the vehicle, you will have

various functions which enable you to

lower your fuel consumption:

– the rev counter;

– gear change indicator;

– the driving style indicator;

– the journey record and eco-driving

advice via the multimedia screen;

– ECO mode.

If fitted on the vehicle, the navigation

system provides additional information.

On the instrument panel

The information display can be organ-

ised and customised based on the in-

strument panel customisation style se-

lected from the multimedia screen.

Rev counter with ECO zone 1

Driving in the ECO zone helps you op-

timise fuel consumption under most cir-

cumstances.

2.17

DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (2/5)

On the multifunction screen

Journey record

Once the engine is switched off, you

will see “Journey record” displayed on

the screen 4, enabling you to view in-

formation relating to your last journey.

This indicates:

– average fuel consumption;

– number of miles/kilometres travelled;

– number of miles/kilometres saved.

This corresponds to driving without

fuel consumption (deceleration and/

or foot off the accelerator pedal).

An overall rating from 0 to 100 is dis-

played to let you assess your eco driv-

ing performance. The higher the rating,

the lower the fuel consumption.

Eco advice is given to help improve

your performance.

With your favourite journeys saved,

you can compare your performance

between trips and the performance of

other vehicle users.

For more information, please see the

multimedia system instructions.

Driving style indicator 3

Informs you about the driving style

adopted in real time. You will be notified

by indicator 3.

The more petals there are on indica-

tor 3, the smoother and more economi-

cal your driving.

If you regularly monitor this indicator,

you will reduce your vehicle’s fuel con-

sumption.

The driving style indicator is activated

by default. If you wish to deactivate it,

please see the multimedia system in-

structions.

2.18

DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (3/5)

ECO mode

ECO mode is a function which opti-

mises fuel consumption. This acts on

all power consuming elements (engine

power, switching gears for vehicles

fitted with an automatic gearbox, heat-

ing and/or air conditioning, etc.).

Limiting acceleration enables low fuel

consumption in urban and surrounding

areas. The air conditioning and heating

limiter enables you to save fuel without

affecting your heating comfort.

Activating the function

The function can be activated:

– by pressing switch 4.

– using the central control 5 (please

refer to the information on “Multi-

Sense” in Section 3);

– from the navigation menu on the

multimedia screen (please refer to

the multimedia instructions).

The warning light

 comes on on

the instrument panel to confirm activa-

tion.

Disabling the function

Press switch 4.

The warning light  goes out on

the instrument panel to confirm deac-

tivation.

While driving, it is possible to leave the

ECO mode temporarily in order to im-

prove engine performance.

For this, depress the accelerator pedal

firmly and fully.

ECO mode is reactivated when you

take pressure off the accelerator pedal.

2.19

Driving advice, Eco-driving

Behaviour

– Drive carefully for the first few miles

until the engine reaches its normal

operating temperature, rather than

let it warm up while the vehicle is sta-

tionary.

– Speed is expensive.

– Dynamic driving with a lot of frequent

acceleration and braking is expen-

sive on fuel in comparison to the time

saved.

– Do not overrev the engine in the in-

termediate gears.

You should always use the highest

gear possible.

– Avoid sudden acceleration.

– Brake as little as possible. If you an-

ticipate an obstacle or bend in ad-

vance, you may then simply release

the accelerator pedal.

– Do not try to maintain the same

speed up a hill, accelerate no more

than you would on flat ground. Keep

your foot in the same position on the

accelerator pedal.

– Double declutching and accelerating

before switching off are unnecessary

in modern vehicles.

Obstructions to the driver

On the driver’s side, only

use mats suitable for the

vehicle, attached with the

pre-fitted components, and check

the fitting regularly. Do not lay one

mat on top of another.

There is a risk of wedging the

pedals

DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (4/5)

– Bad weather, flooded roads:

Do not drive through

floods if the water is

above the lower edge of

the wheel rims.

2.20

DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (5/5)

Advice on use

– Favour the ECO mode.

– Electricity is fuel; switch off all the

electrical components which are

not really needed. However (safety

first), keep your lights on when the

visibility is bad (“see and be seen”).

– Use the air vents. Driving with the

windows open at 60 mph (100 km/h)

will increase fuel consumption by

4%.

– Never fill the fuel tank right to the

brim to avoid overflow.

– In vehicles fitted with air conditio-

ning, it is normal to observe an in-

crease in fuel consumption (espe-

cially in urban conditions) when it is

used. For vehicles fitted with manual

air conditioning, switch off the system

when it is not required.

Recommendations for reducing

consumption and therefore help-

ing to preserve the environment:

If the vehicle has been parked in the

sun, open the doors for a few mo-

ments to let the hot air escape before

starting the engine.

– Do not leave an empty roof rack

fitted to the vehicle.

– It is better to fit a trailer for bulky ob-

jects.

– When towing a caravan, fit a wind

deflector and adjust it carefully.

– Avoid using the car for door-to-door

calls (short journeys with long waits

in between) because the engine

never reaches its normal operating

temperature.

Tyres

– An underinflated tyre increases fuel

consumption.

– Opt for the highest speed pressure

or the pressure recommended to op-

timise fuel consumption indicated

on edge of the driver’s door (please

refer to the information on “Tyre infla-

tion pressure” in Section 4).

– The use of non-recommended tyres

can increase fuel consumption.

2.21

MAINTENANCE AND ANTIPOLLUTION ADVICE

Your vehicle complies with criteria for

recycling and recovering vehicles at the

end of their service life which will come

into force in 2015.

Some parts of your vehicle have there-

fore been designed to facilitate future

recycling.

These parts are easy to remove so

that they can be recovered and reproc-

essed by recycling companies.

By virtue of its design, moderate fuel

consumption and initial settings, your

vehicle also conforms to current anti-

pollution regulations. The manufac-

turer is actively striving to reduce pol-

lutant exhaust gas emissions and to

save energy. But the fuel consumption

of your vehicle and the level of pollutant

exhaust gas emissions are also your

responsibility. Ensure that it is main-

tained and used correctly.

Maintenance

It is important to remember that fail-

ure to respect anti-pollution regulations

could lead to legal action being taken

against the vehicle owner.

In addition, replacing engine, fuel

supply system and exhaust compo-

nents with parts other than those origi-

nally recommended by the manufac-

turer may alter your vehicle so that it

no longer complies with anti-pollution

regulations.

Have your vehicle adjusted and

checked by an authorised dealer, in ac-

cordance with the instructions given in

your maintenance schedule: they will

have all the equipment necessary for

ensuring that your vehicle is maintained

to its original standard.

Engine adjustments

– Spark plugs: for optimum condi-

tions of use, output and performance

the specifications laid down by our

Design Department must be strictly

applied.

If the spark plugs have to be changed,

use the make, type and gap specified

for your vehicle’s engine. Contact an

authorised dealer for this.

– Air filter, fuel filter: a choked ele-

ment will reduce efficiency. It must

be replaced.

– Ignition and idle speed: no adjust-

ment is needed.

Exhaust gas monitoring

system

The exhaust gas monitoring system will

detect any operating faults in the vehi-

cle’s antipollution system.

If this system malfunctions, toxic sub-

stances may be released into the at-

mosphere or damage may occur.

This warning light on the in-

strument panel will indicate if

there are any faults in the system:

This lights up when the ignition is

switched on and goes out when the

engine is started.

– If it lights up continuously, consult an

approved Dealer as soon as possi-

ble;

– if it flashes, reduce the engine speed

until the light stops flashing. Contact

an authorised dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

2.22

ENVIRONMENT

Emissions

Your vehicle has been designed to

emit fewer greenhouse gases (CO2)

while in use, and therefore to consume

less fuel (eg. 140 g/km, equivalent to

5.3 l/100 km for a diesel vehicle).

Our vehicles are also equipped with a

particle filter system including a cata-

lytic converter, an oxygen sensor and

an active carbon filter (the latter pre-

vents vapour from the fuel tank being

released into the open air).

For certain diesel vehicles, this system

also has a particle filter to reduce the

volume of soot particles emitted.

Please make your own

contribution towards

protecting the environment

too

– Worn parts replaced in the course of

routine vehicle maintenance (vehi-

cle battery, oil filter, air filter, batter-

ies, etc.) and oil containers (empty or

filled with used oil) must be disposed

of through specialist organisations.

– At the end of the vehicle’s service

life, it should be sent to approved

centres to ensure that it is recycled.

– In all cases, comply with local legis-

lation.

Recycling

Your vehicle is 85% recyclable and

95% recoverable.

To achieve these objectives, many of

the vehicle components have been de-

signed to enable them to be recycled.

The materials and structures have

been carefully designed to allow these

components to be easily removed and

reprocessed by specialist companies.

In order to preserve raw material re-

sources, this vehicle incorporates nu-

merous parts made from recycled plas-

tics or renewable materials (vegetable

or animal-derived materials such as

cotton or wool).

Your vehicle has been designed with

respect for the environment in mind for

its entire service life: during production,

use and at the end of its life.

This commitment is illustrated by the

Renault eco² signature.

Manufacture

Your vehicle has been manufactured at

a factory which complies with a policy

to reduce the environmental impact

on the surrounding areas (reduction of

water and energy consumption, visual

and noise pollution, atmospheric emis-

sions and waste water; sorting and re-

using waste).

2.23

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (1/3)

If the vehicle is equipped with the func-

tion, this system monitors the tyre pres-

sure.

Operating principle

Each wheel (except for the emergency

spare wheel) has a sensor in the infla-

tion valve which periodically measures

the tyre pressure.

The system displays the current pres-

sures on the instrument panel 1 and

alerts the driver in the event of insuffi-

cient pressure.

Resetting the standard level

for the tyre pressures

This should be done:

– when the standard tyre pressure

needs to be changed to adapt to

usage conditions (empty, carrying a

load, motorway driving, etc.);

– after swapping a wheel (however

this practice is not recommended);

– after changing a wheel.

It should always be done after checking

the tyre pressure of all four tyres when

cold.

Tyre pressures must correspond to the

current usage of the vehicle (empty,

carrying a load, motorway driving, etc.).

Resetting procedure

With the ignition on:

– repeatedly and briefly press con-

trol 2 to select the tyre pressure dis-

play and the “Tyre pressure” func-

tion;

– press and hold (around 3 seconds)

the button 2 to launch the reset. The

flashing tyres followed by the mes-

sages “Learning TP initiated” and

then “Tyres location in progress” in-

dicates that the reset request for the

tyre pressure reference value has

been acknowledged.

Reset can take several minutes of driv-

ing.

If the resetting is followed by short

trips, the message “Tyres location in

progress” can remain displayed after

successive restarts.

Note

The standard tyre pressure cannot be

less than that recommended and indi-

cated on the door frame.

Resetting can also be done from the

multifunction screen 3. Select the

menu “Vehicle”, “Tyre pressure”.

2.24

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (2/3)

Display

The display 1 and the warning light 4

 on the instrument panel warn

you of any tyre pressure faults (flat tyre,

punctured tyre, system fault, etc.).

“Puncture”

A wheel B is shown in red, the warning

light 4  comes on, the message

“Puncture” appears and there is a beep.

This message appears along with the

® warning light.

They indicate that the affected wheel

is punctured or severely underinflated.

Replace it or contact an approved

dealer if it is punctured. Top up the tyre

pressure if the wheel is deflated.

“Check tyre pressure sensors”

A wheel A disappears, the warning

light 4

 flashes for several sec-

onds then comes on continuously and

the message “Check tyre pressure sen-

sors” appears.

This message appears along with the

at least one wheel is not fitted with sen-

sors (e.g. emergency spare wheel).

Otherwise, consult an authorised

dealer.

“Adjust tyre pressure”

A wheel B is shown in orange, the

warning light 4

 comes on and

the message “Adjust tyre pressure” ap-

pears.

They indicate that a wheel is deflated.

Check and, if necessary, readjust the

pressures of the four wheels when cold.

The warning light 4

 goes off after

a few minutes’ driving.

For your safety, the warning

light

® requires you to

stop immediately as soon

as traffic conditions allow.

The sudden loss of pressure in a tyre (burst tyre, etc.) cannot be detected by the

system.

2.25

Tyre repair product and

inflation kit

Because the valves are specially de-

signed, only use equipment approved

by the approved network. Please refer

to “Tyre inflation kit” in Section 5.

Replacing wheels/tyres

This system requires specific equip-

ment (wheels, tyres, hubcaps, etc.).

Please see the information on “Tyres”

in Section 5.

Contact an approved Dealer to fit new

tyres and to find out about available ac-

cessories compatible with the system

and available from your dealer net-

work: the use of any other accessory

could affect the correct operation of the

system or damage a sensor.

Emergency spare wheel

If the vehicle is equipped with an emer-

gency spare wheel, it will not have a

sensor. If the vehicle is fitted with one,

the warning light 4

 flashes for

several seconds then comes on con-

tinuously along with the

ing light, and the message "Check tyre

pressure sensors” appears on the in-

strument panel.

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (3/3)

Changing a wheel

The system may take sev-

eral minutes depending on

use for the new wheel po-

sitions and pressures to be recog-

nised; check the tyre pressures after

all operations.

“Tyres location in progress”

This message “Tyres location in

progress” appears when driving if one

or more wheels have been fitted with

sensors not recognised by Renault.

Consult an approved dealer

Readjustment of tyre

pressures

The tyre pressures should be ad-

justed when cold (please refer to the

label located on the edge of the driver’s

door). If the tyre pressures cannot be

checked when the tyres are cold, the

recommended pressures should be in-

creased by 0.2 to 0.3 bar (3 PSI).

Never deflate a hot tyre.

This function is an addi-

tional driving aid.

However, the function is

not intended to replace the

driver. It cannot, therefore, under

any circumstances replace the vig-

ilance or the responsibility of the

driver. Check the tyre pressures, in-

cluding the emergency spare wheel,

once a month.

2.26

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (1/12)

ABS (anti-lock braking

system)

Under heavy braking, the ABS prevents

the wheels from locking, allowing the

stopping distance to be managed and

keeping control of the vehicle.

Under these circumstances, the vehi-

cle can be steered to avoid an obstacle

whilst braking. In addition, this system

can increase stopping distances, par-

ticularly on roads with low surface grip

(wet ground etc.).

You will feel a pulsation through the

brake pedal each time the system is

activated. The ABS does not in any way

improve the vehicle's physical perform-

ance relating to the road surface and

roadholding. It is still essential to follow

the rules of good driving practice (such

as driving at a safe distance from the

vehicle in front etc.).

– ABS (anti-lock braking system) ;

– ESC (electronic stability control)

with understeer control and trac-

tion control;

– emergency brake assist;

– advanced traction control;

– active emergency braking;

– driver assistance with a trailer;

– hill start assistance;

– rear wheel steering.

Other driving assistance systems are

detailed on the following pages.

In an emergency, apply firm and

continuous pressure to the brake

pedal. There is no need to pump

it repeatedly. The ABS will modu-

late the force applied in the braking

system.

These functions are an ad-

ditional aid in the event of

critical driving conditions,

enabling the vehicle behav-

iour to be adapted to suit the driving

conditions.

However, the functions do not take

the place of the driver. They do

not increase the vehicle’s limits

and should not encourage you

to drive more quickly. Therefore,

they can under no circumstances

replace the vigilance or responsibil-

ity of the driver when manoeuvring

the vehicle (the driver must always

be ready for sudden incidents which

may occur when driving).

2.27

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (2/12)

Operating faults:

–

strument panel alongside mes-

sages “Check ABS”, “Check braking

system” and “Check ESC”: indicates

the ABS, ESC and emergency brake

assist are deactivated. Braking is

always enabled;

–

x, D, © and ® lit

up on the instrument panel alongside

the message “Braking system fault”:

this indicates a fault in the braking

system.

In both cases, consult an approved

dealer.

Your braking systems

are partially operational.

However, it is dangerous

to brake suddenly and

it is essential to stop immediately,

as soon as traffic conditions allow.

Contact an approved dealer.

Warning light ® re-

quires you to stop immedi-

ately, for your own safety,

as soon as traffic conditions allow.

Switch off the engine and do not re-

start it. Contact an approved Dealer.

2.28

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (3/12)

Electronic stability control

ESC with understeer control

and traction control

Electronic stability control ESC

This system helps you to keep control

of the vehicle in critical driving condi-

tions (avoiding an obstacle, loss of grip

on a bend, etc.).

Operating principle

A sensor in the steering wheel detects

the direction selected by the driver.

Other sensors throughout the vehicle

measure the actual direction.

The system compares driver input to

the actual trajectory of the vehicle and

corrects the trajectory if necessary by

controlling the braking of certain wheels

and/or engine power. In the event that

the system is engaged, indicator light

 flashes on the instrument panel.

Understeer control

This system optimises the action of the

ESC in the case of pronounced under-

steer (loss of front axle road holding).

Traction control

This system helps to limit wheelspin of

the drive wheels and to control the ve-

hicle when pulling away accelerating or

decelerating.

Operating principle

Using the wheel sensors, the system

measures and compares the speed of

the drive wheels at all times and slows

down their over-rotation. If a wheel is

starting to slip, the system brakes au-

tomatically until the drive supplied be-

comes compatible with the level of grip

under the wheel again.

The system also adjusts the engine

speed to the grip available under the

wheels, independently of the pressure

exerted on the accelerator pedal.

Operating faults

When the system detects an operat-

ing fault the message “Check ESC” and

warning light

on the instrument panel.

In this case, the ESC and traction con-

trol system are deactivated. Consult an

authorised dealer.

2.29

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (4/12)

Emergency brake assist

This system supplements the ABS

and helps reduce vehicle stopping dis-

tances.

Operating principle

The system is for detecting an emer-

gency braking situation. In this case,

the braking assistance immediately de-

velops maximum power and may trig-

ger ABS regulation.

ABS braking is maintained as long as

the brake pedal is applied.

Hazard warning lights switching on

Depending on the vehicle, these may

light up in the event of sudden decel-

eration.

Braking anticipation

Depending on the vehicle, when you

rapidly release the accelerator, the

system anticipates the braking ma-

noeuvre in order to reduce stopping

distances.

Special cases

When using the cruise control:

– if you use the accelerator, when you

release it, the system may be trig-

gered;

– if you do not use the accelerator, the

system will not be triggered.

Operating faults

When the system detects an operat-

ing fault the message “Check brak-

ing system” appears on the instrument

panel along with the

light.

Consult an approved dealer.

2.30

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (5/12)

Advanced traction control

If fitted on the vehicle, grip control

makes it easier to control the vehicle on

low grip surfaces (soft ground, etc.).

Tyres

When they need to be re-

placed, only tyres of the

same make, size, type and

profile should be used.

Tyres fitted to the vehicle should

either be identical to those fitted

originally or conform to those

recommended by your approved

dealer.

These functions are an ad-

ditional aid in the event of

critical driving conditions,

enabling the vehicle behav-

iour to be adapted to suit the driving

conditions.

However, the functions do not take

the place of the driver. They do

not increase the vehicle’s limits

and should not encourage you

to drive more quickly. Therefore,

they can under no circumstances

replace the vigilance or responsibil-

ity of the driver when manoeuvring

the vehicle (the driver must always

be ready for sudden incidents which

may occur when driving).

Activating or deactivating the

system

From the multifunction screen, select

menu “Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”,

“Traction control” then select the mode:

« Auto »

The “Auto Advanced Traction Control”

message is shown on the instrument

panel for approximately 15 seconds.

This position enables optimal usage

under normal driving conditions (dry-

ness, humidity, light snow, etc.).

« Expert »

This position enables optimal usage on

soft ground (mud, sand, dead leaves,

etc.). “Expert” mode uses traction con-

trol functions.

The system automatically switches to

“Auto” mode at speeds above 30 mph

(50 km/h), and warning light “Auto

Advanced Traction Control” is dis-

played on the instrument panel for ap-

proximately 15 seconds.

Note: The system’s default mode is

“Auto” mode.

2.31

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (6/12)

If the driver depresses the brake pedal

and the system still detects a risk of col-

lision, the brake force is increased.

If the driver fails to react following

an alert of an imminent collision, the

system activates the brakes.

Active emergency braking

Using the sensor 1, the system calcu-

lates the distance separating the vehi-

cle from the one in front and alerts the

driver if there is a risk of a front-end col-

lision. The driver can then brake the ve-

hicle to limit the damage arising from a

collision.

Note: Make sure that the sensor 1 is

not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).

Operation

While driving (at speeds of between 20

and 85 mph (30 and 140 km/h)), if there

is a risk of collision with the vehicle in

front, warning light 2 will be displayed

on the instrument panel in red and, de-

pending on the vehicle, on the head-up

display, alongside a beep.

The system only detects vehicles

driving in the same direction of traf-

fic. The system cannot detect mo-

torcycles because of the difficulty in

forecasting their trajectory.

1 2

2.32

Conditions for non-activation of the

system

The system cannot be activated:

– when the gear lever is in neutral;

– when the parking brake is activated;

– while cornering.

Activating or deactivating the

system

From the multifunction screen 3, select

menu “Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”,

“Active braking” then choose “ON” or

“OFF”.

Warning light

 is displayed on the

instrument panel when the system is

deactivated.

This system is reactivated each time

the ignition is switched on.

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (7/12)

You can access the “Driving as-

sistance” menu directly from the

button 4 .

Operating faults

When the system detects an operating

fault, warning light “

” appears on

the instrument panel along with warning

light

Active braking”.

Consult an approved dealer.

2.33

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (8/12)

Active emergency braking

This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the

due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

System servicing/repairs

– In the event of an impact, the sensor alignment may become changed, and its operation will consequently be affected.

Deactivate the function, then consult an authorised dealer.

– Any servicing on the bumper (replacement, repair, paint retouching, etc.) should be undertaken by a qualified professional.

– Fitting accessories which may block the radar is prohibited (bull-bars, etc.).

Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.

In the event of system disturbance

Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:

– a complex environment (metal bridge, etc.);

– poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice, etc.).

Risk of inadvertent braking.

2.34

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (9/12)

Active emergency braking

Limitation of the system operation

– The system will only respond to vehicles which are moving or which have been sensed as moving.

– A vehicle travelling in the opposite direction will not trigger any alert or any action on the system operation.

– The sensor area should be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the proper operation of the system.

– The system cannot respond to small vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles as effectively as to other vehicles.

Deactivating the function

The function should be deactivated if:

– the brake lights are not functioning;

– the bumper has suffered an impact or damage;

– the vehicle is being towed (breakdowns).

Halting the function

You can halt the automatic braking function at any time by tapping the accelerator pedal or by turning the steering wheel in a

avoidance manoeuvre.

If the driver notices any unusual behaviour in the system, please consult an authorised dealer.

2.35

Operating principle

The function stabilises the vehicle by:

– asymmetric braking of the front

wheels to reduce shaking caused by

the trailer;

– braking of all four wheels and limita-

tion on engine torque to reduce the

vehicle speed until the shaking has

stopped.

Warning light

 flashes on the in-

strument panel to inform the driver.

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (10/12)

Driver assistance with a

trailer

This system helps to maintain control

over the vehicle while using a trailer.

It detects shaking caused by towing a

trailer under certain driving conditions.

Operating conditions

– The function should be activated by

an authorised dealer;

– the towbar must be approved by an

authorised dealer;

– the wiring must be approved by an

authorised dealer;

– the towbar must be connected to the

vehicle.

If the towbar wiring is

plugged in but no trailer

is attached (bicycle car-

rier, luggage carrier with

lighting, etc.), the function may act

under certain rutted road conditions.

Risk of vehicle deceleration.

2.36

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (11/12)

Hill start assistance

This function assists the driver when

starting on hills. It prevents the vehicle

from rolling backwards by automatically

applying the brakes when the driver lifts

his/her foot off the brake pedal to de-

press the accelerator pedal.

System operation

It only operates when the gear lever is

in a position other than neutral (other

than N or P for automatic transmis-

sions) and the vehicle is completely

stationary (brake pedal depressed)

The system holds the vehicle for ap-

proximately 2 seconds. The brakes are

then released (the vehicle will move ac-

cording to the slope).

The hill start assistance

system cannot completely

prevent the vehicle from

rolling backwards in all sit-

uations (extremely steep gradients,

etc.).

In all cases, the driver may depress

the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-

cle from rolling backwards.

The hill start assistance function

should not be used for prolonged

stops: use the brake pedal.

This function is not designed to im-

mobilise the vehicle permanently.

If necessary, use the brake pedal to

stop the vehicle.

The driver must remain particularly

vigilant when driving on slippery or

low-grip surfaces and/or on hills.

Risk of serious injury.

2.37

Rear wheel steering

On equipped vehicles, this system,

when the vehicle is being driven, steers

the rear wheels according to driving

conditions: at low speed this system

offers manoeuvrability, at higher speeds

it optimises stability.

When driving at low speeds, the rear

wheels steer in the opposite direction to

the front wheels (figure A) to increase

the vehicle’s manoeuvrability. This is

used when driving in towns, on winding

roads, during parking manoeuvres, etc.

When driving at higher speeds, the rear

wheels steer in the same direction as

the front wheels (figure B) to optimise

the vehicle’s stability. This is useful

when changing lanes or when corner-

ing etc.

Note: The system configuration (agil-

ity, etc.) depends on the mode selected

in the “Multi-Sense” menu (please refer

to the information on “Multi-Sense” in

Section 2).

Operating faults

– If the

with the message “Check power

steering”, is displayed on the instru-

ment panel: please contact an au-

thorised dealer.

– If the warning light

®, together

with the message “Power steering

fault”, is displayed on the instrument

panel, this indicates a fault in the

system.

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (12/12)

A B

® requires you to stop

as soon as traffic conditions

allow. Contact an approved

Dealer.

An impact to the underside of the

vehicle (e.g.: striking a post, raised

kerb or other street furniture) may

result in damage to the vehicle (e.g.:

deformation of an axle).

To avoid any risk of accident, have

your vehicle checked by an ap-

proved Dealer.

2.38

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (1/3)

This function is a driving aid in the event of the accidental crossing of

a continuous or broken line in the road. However, the function is not in-

tended to replace the driver. The function can be disrupted under certain

conditions, including:

– poor visibility (rain, snow, fog, dirty windscreen, glare of the sun, partially obs-

cured road lines, etc.);

– roads with tight bends;

– closely following a vehicle in the same lane;

– worn road markings, difficult to distinguish or spaced very widely apart;

– narrow roads;

– ...

In this case, the line visibility indicators remain uncoloured on the instrument

panel to indicate that the function will not operate (lines not detected).

Under no circumstances should this function replace the driver’s care or res-

ponsibility whilst performing manoeuvres.

This system notifies the driver when

they accidentally cross a continuous or

broken line.

This function uses a camera attached

to the windscreen, behind the rear-view

mirror.

On equipped vehicles, some infor-

mation is given on the head-up dis-

play.

2.39

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (2/3)

Conditions for non-activation

of alerts

– Indicators activated or having been

activated less than approximately

four seconds prior to departing from

the lane;

– Very fast lane departure;

– Driving continuously on a line;

– On bends, the function allows for

slightly cutting the bend;

– ...

Activation/deactivation

From the multifunction screen 1: select

“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Lane

departure warning” then choose “ON”

or “OFF”.

When the function is activated, the vi-

sibility indicators 3 for the left and right

lines are displayed in grey on the ins-

trument panel.

The function is set to notify the

driver if:

– the vehicle speed is greater than ap-

proximately 45 mph (70 km/h);

and

– lines are detected and the visibility

indicators 3 are green.

The function triggers an alert if a line

is crossed without the direction indica-

tors being activated. The function alerts

the driver through a beep and the indi-

cator the line crossed switches to red

on the instrument panel.

You can access menu “Driving as-

sistance” directly from button 2

.

2.40

Adjustment

From the multifunction screen 1, select

“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Lane

departure warning settings” then in:

– volume: adjust the alert volume to

one of five levels;

– sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity level

for line detection. To do this select:

– “Low” line detected upon cros-

sing;

– “Middle” line detected on ap-

proach;

– “high” line detected nearby.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (3/3)

Operating faults

In the event of a malfunction, a mes-

sage “Lane departure warning check” is

displayed on the instrument panel, and

the visibility indicators for the left and

right lines disappear from the instru-

ment panel.

Consult an approved dealer.

2.41

BLIND SPOT WARNING (1/3)

This system alerts the driver to other

vehicles in the detection zone A.

The system is activated when the vehi-

cle’s speed is between approxima-

tely 30 km/h (19 mph) and 140 km/h

(87 mph).

This function uses sensors 1 installed

in the front and rear bumper of both

sides.

Activation/deactivation

On the multifunction screen 2, select

the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving assis-

tance”, and “Blind spot alert”, and then

choose “ON” or “OFF”.

Special feature

Make sure that the sensors are not obs-

cured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).

If a sensor is obscured, the message

“Blind spot clean sensor” will appear on

the instrument panel. If this happens,

please clean the sensors.

You can access the “Driving assis-

tance” menu directly by pressing the

button 3 .

When the engine is started, the system

remembers its position when the igni-

tion was last switched off.

2.42

BLIND SPOT WARNING (2/3)

Operation

This function will indicate:

– when the vehicle speed is between

approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) and

140 km/h (87 mph);

– when another vehicle is in the blind

spot area and travelling in the same

direction as your vehicle.

If another vehicle is being overtaken,

the indicator 4 will be activated only if

that vehicle remains in the blind spot for

more than one second.

Indicator 4

An indicator light 4 is situated on both

door mirrors 5.

Note: Clean the door mirrors 5 regu-

larly, so that the indicator lights 4 can

be seen properly.

Display B

The function is activated and has not

detected any vehicles.

Display C

Initial warning: the indicator light 4

shows that a vehicle has been detected

in the blind spot.

Display D

When the direction indicator is activa-

ted, the indicator light 4 flashes when a

vehicle is detected in the blind spot on

the side towards which you are about to

steer. If you cancel the direction indica-

tor, the function will return to the initial

warning (display C).

Note: The system’s detection range

operates according to a standard

lane width. If you are driving in

narrow traffic lanes, it may detect

vehicles in other lanes.

2.43

Operating faults

If the system detects a fault, the mes-

sage “Check blind spot alert” is dis-

played on the instrument panel. Consult

an authorised dealer.

Note: When the engine is started, the

indicator light 4 (display B) flashes

three times. It is normal.

– The system’s detection

range operates according

to a standard lane width. If

you are driving in wide traf-

fic lanes, the system might not

be able to detect a vehicle in the

blind spot.

– The system might be disrupted

momentarily if it is exposed to

strong electromagnetic waves

(as beneath high-tension power

lines) or to very poor weather

conditions (heavy rain, snow,

etc.). Remain aware of driving

conditions.

There is a risk of accidents.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (3/3)

Because sensors have

been installed in the bum-

pers, any work (repairs, re-

placements, touching up of

paintwork) must be carried out by a

qualified professional.

Conditions for non-function

– If the object is not moving;

– if traffic is heavy;

– the road is winding;

– if front and rear sensors both detect

objects at the same time (e.g. when

passing an articulated lorry).

– ...

This function is an addi-

tional aid which indicates

other vehicles in the blind

spot area.

It can never in any case be a subs-

titute for care nor for the driver’s

responsibility while in charge of his

vehicle.

The driver should always look out

for sudden hazards during driving:

make sure while manoeuvring that

there are no moving or movable ob-

jects (such as a child, an animal, a

pushchair or a bicycle) or small or

narrow obstacles (such as a boulder

or a post) in the blind spot area.

2.44

SAFE DISTANCE ALERT (1/2)

Activating/deactivating the

function

From the multifunction screen 2, select

menu “Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”,

“Distance warning” then choose “ON”

or “OFF”.

Using the sensor 1, this function noti-

fies the driver about the time interval

separating them from the vehicle in

front, so they can respect a safe dis-

tance between the two vehicles.

Note: make sure that the sensor 1 is

not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).

The function is activated when the ve-

hicle speed is between about 20 and

125 mph (30 and 200 km/h).

When the engine is started, the func-

tion maintains the same status that was

active when the engine was last stop-

ped.

You can access menu “Driving as-

sistance” directly from button 3

.

This function is an additio-

nal driving aid. However,

this function is not under

any circumstances in-

tended to replace the due care and

attention of the driver, who should at

all times be in control of the vehicle.

2.45

SAFE DISTANCE ALERT (2/2)

The measurement is dis-

played for information only:

the system performs no

action on the vehicle.

This function is not designed for use

in urban conditions or for a dynamic

driving style (sudden cornering, ac-

celeration, braking, etc.), but rather

for stable driving conditions.

The function does not interact with

the braking system.

The sensor area should be kept

clean and free of any modifications

in order to ensure the proper opera-

tion of the system.

Any servicing on the bumper (re-

placement, repair, paint retouching,

etc.) should be undertaken by a

qualified professional.

– C (orange): the time interval falls

between around 1 and 2 seconds (in-

sufficient distance between the two

vehicles);

– D (red): the time interval is less than

or equal to around one second (very

insufficient distance between the two

vehicles).

If the interval between the two vehicles

is less than around 0.5 seconds, war-

ning light 4 will flash on the instrument

panel. Under certain conditions, the

time interval may not be displayed:

– while cornering;

– when changing lane;

– if the vehicle in front is sufficiently far

or outside the range of the sensor.

This function is essential if adaptive

cruise control is activated.

On equipped vehicles, some infor-

mation is given on the head-up dis-

play.

Operation

Upon activating the function, indicator 4

notifies the driver of the distance sepa-

rating them from the vehicle in front.

– A (grey): function not operational;

– A (green): no vehicle detected;

– B (green): the time interval is greater

than or equal to around two seconds

(distance between the two vehicles

adapted to your speed);

2.46

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (1/3)

Switching on

Press switch 1 on side . The indica-

tor light

 comes on, lit orange, and

the message “Speed limiter” appears

on the instrument panel, accompanied

by dashes to indicate that the speed

limiter function is activated and waiting

to store a limited speed.

To store the current speed, press

switch 2 on side a (+): the limited

speed will replace the dashes.

The minimum stored speed is 20 mph

(30 km/h).

Controls

1 Main “On/Off” switch.

2 Controls for:

a speed limiter activation, memory

and increase (+);

b decreasing the speed limiter (-).

3 Activation and recall of memorised

limited speed (R).

4 Speed limiter function standby (with

limited speed memory) (O).

The speed limiter function helps you

stay within the driving speed limit that

you choose, known as the limit speed.

If you wish, you can associate the

speed limiter and the “Overspeed

alert” function (please refer to the in-

formation on the “Overspeed alert”

in Section 2).

a 3

2.47

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (2/3)

Exceeding the limit speed

It is possible to exceed the limit speed

at any time. To do this: press the acce-

lerator pedal firmly and fully (beyond

the resistance point).

While the speed is being exceeded, the

speed limiter flashes red on the instru-

ment panel.

Then, release the accelerator: the

speed limiter function will return as

soon as you reach a speed lower than

the stored speed.

Limited speed cannot be maintained

If driving up or down a steep gradient,

the system is unable to maintain the

limited speed: the stored speed flashes

red on the instrument panel and a beep

sounds at regular intervals to inform

you.

Varying the limit speed

The speed limiter can be changed by

repeatedly pressing switch 2 :

– side a (+) to increase the speed;

– side b (-) to reduce the speed.

Driving

When a limited speed has been stored

and this speed is not reached, driving is

similar to driving a vehicle without the

speed limiter function.

Once you have reached the stored

speed, no effort on the accelerator pedal

will allow you to exceed the program-

med speed except in an emergency

(refer to information on “Exceeding the

limit speed”).

The speed limiter function is

in no way linked to the bra-

king system.

2.48

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (3/3)

Recalling the limit speed

If a speed has been stored, it can be re-

called by pressing switch 3 (R).

Putting the function on

standby

The speed limiter function is suspended

when you press switch 4 (O). In this

case, the speed limit remains stored

and the message “Memorised” accom-

panied by this speed appears on the

instrument panel.

Switching off the function

The speed limiter function is deactiva-

ted if you press switch 1: in this case a

speed is no longer stored. The orange

instrument panel warning light

 goes

out, confirming that the function is stop-

ped.

When the speed limiter is put on

standby, pressing side a (+) on

switch 2 reactivates the function wi-

thout taking into account the stored

speed: it is the speed at which the

vehicle is moving that is taken into

account.

2.49

OVERSPEED ALERT (1/3)

The overspeed alert with signage panel

recognition notifies the driver that they

are exceeding the speed limit for the

section of road on which they are cur-

rently travelling.

Special situations

– If the vehicle is travelling in a coun-

try where the speed units differ from

those of the vehicle, the system dis-

plays the speed limit sign in the unit

of the country, alongside the speed

limit converted to the unit used by the

vehicle’s instrument panel.

– For countries where the speed limit

is reduced during rainy weather on

some types of roads, the system can

modify the limited speed after a few

seconds of wiping the windscreen.

– The system does not take into ac-

count exceptional speed limit meas-

ures, such as peak pollution days.

On equipped vehicles, some infor-

mation is given on the head-up dis-

play.

Operating principle

The system detects speed limit signs

on the side of the road and displays the

speed limit.

It mainly uses information taken from

the camera 1, attached to the wind-

screen behind the rear-view mirror.

Note: Make sure the windscreen is not

obstructed (dirt, ice, snow, etc.).

The system also uses information from

other vehicle systems (navigation GPS,

etc.).

Once the speed limiter is activated, you

can adjust the speed limiter indication

displayed by the system.

In the event of exceeding the speed

limit, the sign display is modified (the

characters change to red or the circle

around the sign flashes) no notify you.

2.50

OVERSPEED ALERT (2/3)

Activating/deactivating the

system

On the multifunction screen 2, select

the “Vehicle” menu, followed by “Driving

assistance”, “Speed alert settings”,

“Speed warning”, then choose “ON” or

“OFF”.

With the function activated and de-

pending on local laws, you can activate

the “increased vigilance zones”. The

system will notify you of the distance

separating you from this zone, and

while you are travelling in the zone.

Varying the limit speed

If the speed limiter notification differs

from the detected speed value, press

and hold switch 4:

– side a (+) to increase the notification

speed to the detected speed;

– side b (-) to reduce the notification

speed to the detected speed.

Operating fault

The system cannot detect the speed

limit if:

– the windscreen is not clean;

– the camera is blinded by the sun;

– there is insufficient visibility (night,

fog, etc.);

– the signs are not legible (snow, etc.)

or are hidden (by another vehicle or

by trees);

– the information taken from a naviga-

tion system is not up to date.

You can access menu “Driving as-

sistance” directly from button 3

.

2.51

This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the

due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of the system indications.

The system enables maximum speed signs to be detected and does not detect other traffic signage.

The driver should not, however, ignore signs which are not detected by the system and should as a priority comply with the

traffic signage and the highway code.

In the event of poor visibility (fog, snow, frost, etc.), it is possible that the system may not indicate the correct speed to the

driver.

The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of the system indications.

OVERSPEED ALERT (3/3)

2.52

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (1/4)

The cruise control function helps you to

maintain your driving speed at a speed

that you choose, called the cruising

speed.

This cruising speed may be set at any

speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

The cruise control function

is in no way linked to the

braking system.

This function is an addi-

tional driving aid. However,

the function does not take

the place of the driver.

Therefore, it can under no circum-

stances replace the driver’s respon-

sibility to respect speed limits and to

be vigilant (the driver must always

be ready to brake). Cruise control

must not be used in heavy traffic, on

undulating or slippery roads (black

ice, aquaplaning, gravel) and during

bad weather (fog, rain, side winds

etc.).

There is a risk of accidents.

Controls

1 Main “On/Off” switch.

2 Controls for:

a cruising speed activation, storage

and increase (+) ;

b decreasing cruising speed (-).

3 Activation with recall of saved cruis-

ing speed (R).

4 Switch the function to standby (with

cruising speed saved) (O).

2.53

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (2/4)

Driving

Once a cruising speed is memorised

and the cruise control function is active,

you may lift your foot off the accelera-

tor pedal.

Please note that you are

strongly advised to keep

your feet close to the pedals

in order to react in an emer-

gency.

Activating cruise control

At a steady speed (above approx.

20 mph or 30 km/h), press switch 2

side a (+): the function is activated and

the current speed is saved.

The cruising speed replaces the dashes

and cruise control is confirmed by the

appearance of the message “Check

cruise control” and the warning light

.

If you try to activate the function below

20 mph (30 km/h), the message “Invalid

speed” will be displayed and the func-

tion will remain inactive.

Switching on

Press switch 1 on side .

Indicator light

 comes on, lit green,

and the message “Check cruise con-

trol” appears on the instrument panel,

accompanied by dashes to indicate that

the cruise control function is activated

and waiting to store a cruising speed.

2.54

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (3/4)

Exceeding the cruising speed

The cruising speed may be exceeded

at any time by depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. While overtaking, the cruis-

ing speed flashes red on the instrument

panel.

Then, release the accelerator: after a

few seconds, the vehicle will automati-

cally return to its set cruising speed.

Cruising speed cannot be

maintained

If driving up or down a steep gradi-

ent, the system is unable to maintain

the cruising speed: the stored speed is

flashes red on the instrument panel to

inform you of this situation.

Adjusting the cruising speed

The cruising speed can be changed by

pressing the switch 2 repeatedly:

– side a (+) to increase the speed;

– side b (-) to reduce the speed.

The cruise control function

is in no way linked to the

braking system.

2.55

CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (4/4)

Switching off the function

The cruise control function is deacti-

vated if you press switch 1: in this case

a speed is no longer stored. The green

 warning light and message on the

instrument panel goes out to confirm

that the function is deactivated.

Returning to the cruising speed

If a speed is stored, it can be recalled,

once you are sure that the road con-

ditions are suitable (traffic, road sur-

face, weather conditions, etc.). Press

switch 3 (R) if the vehicle speed is

above 20 mph (30 km/h).

When the stored speed is recalled,

activation of the cruise control is con-

firmed by the illumination of the cruis-

ing speed in green, along with the mes-

sage “Check cruise control”.

NB: if the speed previously stored is

much higher than the current speed,

the vehicle will accelerate more rapidly

to reach this threshold.

When the cruise control function is

put on standby, pressing switch 2

side a (+) reactivates the cruise

control function without taking into

account the stored speed: it is the

speed at which the vehicle is moving

that is taken into account.

Putting the function on

standby

The function is set to standby if you:

– use the switch 4 (O);

– the brake pedal;

– depress the clutch pedal or the shift

into neutral if the vehicle has an au-

tomatic gearbox.

In these three cases, the cruising

speed remains stored and the mes-

sage “Memorised” accompanied by this

speed appears on the instrument panel.

Standby is confirmed by the display of

the cruising speed in grey and the mes-

sage “Memorised”.

Putting the cruise control

on standby or switching it

off does not cause a rapid

reduction in speed: you

must brake by depressing the brake

pedal.

2.56

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (1/7)

When traffic conditions permit (large

free-flowing road or motorway), the

adaptive cruise control gives you the

option of maintaining a chosen speed,

known as cruise control, adjusta-

ble from 30 mph to 85 mph (50 and

140 km/h), while keeping a following

distance from the vehicle in front in the

same lane.

The sensor has a range of 120 metres.

Note: The driver should take into ac-

count the maximum speed limit in their

location.

Note: The adaptive cruise control can

brake the vehicle up to a third of the

braking capacity. Depending on the

situation, the driver may need to brake

harder.

This function is an addi-

tional driving aid. However,

the function does not take

the place of the driver.

Therefore, it can under no circum-

stances replace the driver’s respon-

sibility to respect speed limits and to

be vigilant (the driver must always

be ready to brake).

The adaptive cruise control should

not be used in heavy traffic, on

winding or slippery roads (black ice,

aquaplaning, gravel) and during bad

weather (fog, rain, side winds etc.).

There is a risk of accidents.

Sensor location

Make sure that the sensor 1 is not ob-

scured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).

On equipped vehicles, some infor-

mation is given on the head-up dis-

play.

2.57

The cruising speed replaces the dashes

and cruise control is confirmed by the

appearance of the message “Adaptive

cruise ctrl” and the warning light



If you try to activate the function below

30 mph (50 km/h) or above 85 mph

(140 km/h), the message “Invalid

speed” is displayed and the function will

remain inactive.

Adjusting the following

distance

Pressing switch 6 multiple times ad-

justs the following distance.

Switching on

Press switch 5. Warning light



comes on, lit green, and the message

“Adaptive cruise ctrl” appears on the

instrument panel, accompanied by

dashes to indicate that the cruise con-

trol function is activated and waiting to

store a cruising speed.

Activating cruise control

At a steady speed (above approx.

30 mph (50 km/h)), press switch 2

side a (+): the function is activated and

the current speed is saved.

Controls

5 Main “On/Off” switch.

2 Controls for:

a cruising speed activation, storage

and increase (+) ;

b decreasing cruising speed (-).

3 Activation with recall of saved cruis-

ing speed (R).

4 Switch the function to standby (with

cruising speed saved) (O).

6 Adjusting following distance.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (2/7)

2.58

Driving

Once a cruising speed is memorised

and the cruise control function is active,

you may lift your foot off the accelera-

tor pedal.

If a following distance is stored and a

vehicle travelling slower than yours is

detected by the system in your lane,

your vehicle will brake (with the brake

lights on) and adapt its speed to that of

the vehicle in front, respecting the fol-

lowing distance selected previously.

Overtaking

If your speed is lower than the cruise

control and you wish to perform an

overtaking manoeuvre, activating the

direction indicator will provide acceler-

ation enabling the overtaking manoeu-

vre.

Please note that you are

strongly advised to keep

your feet close to the pedals

in order to react in an emer-

gency.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (3/7)

Adjusting the cruising speed

The cruising speed can be changed by

pressing the switch 2 repeatedly:

– side a (+) to increase the speed;

– side b (-) to reduce the speed.

Varying the following

distance

You can vary the following distance

from the vehicle in front at any time by

pressing switch 6 repeatedly.

Horizontal following bars will be dis-

played on the instrument panel, indicat-

ing the following distance selected:

– one bar for a short distance (cor-

responding to a following time of

around one second);

– two bars for a medium distance;

– three bars for a long distance (cor-

responding to a following time of

around two seconds).

Choosing the distance should depend

on the traffic, the laws in your country,

and on the weather conditions.

If a vehicle is detected by the system in

your lane, an outline A of a vehicle will

appear above the following bars.

2.59

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (4/7)

Exceeding the cruising speed

The cruising speed may be exceeded

at any time by depressing the accelera-

tor pedal.

When exceeding this speed, the cruis-

ing speed and the following bars show

red and the cruising speed flashes on

the instrument panel: the distance con-

trol function is no longer activated.

Then, release the accelerator: cruise

and distance control will automatically

reactivate unless the function has been

set to standby.

Putting the function on

standby

The function is set to standby if:

– you press switch 4 (O);

– you depress the brake pedal;

– you depress the clutch pedal;

– you use the gear lever;

– the vehicle speed is lower than

20 mph (40 km/h) or over 100 mph

(160 km/h);

– certain driver correction devices and

aids are triggered (ABS, ESC, etc.)

In the latter two cases, the message

“Adaptive cruise ct disconnected” is

displayed on the instrument panel when

the function is set to standby.

Standby is confirmed by the display of

the cruising speed in grey and the mes-

sage “Adaptive cruise ctrl”.

Returning to the cruising speed

If a speed is stored, it can be recalled,

once you are sure that the road con-

ditions are suitable (traffic, road sur-

face, weather conditions, etc.). Press

switch 3 (R) if the vehicle speed is

above around 30 mph (50 km/h).

When the stored speed is recalled,

activation of the cruise control is con-

firmed by the illumination of the cruis-

ing speed in green, along with the mes-

sage “Adaptive cruise ctrl”.

When the cruise control function is put

on standby, pressing switch 2 side a

(+) reactivates the cruise control func-

tion without taking into account the

stored speed: it is the speed at which

the vehicle is moving that is taken into

account.

a 3

2.60

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (5/7)

Switching off the function

The cruise control function is deacti-

vated if you press switch 5: in this case

a speed is no longer stored. The green



indicator light and the message

”Adaptive cruise ctrl” on the instrument

panel go out to confirm that the function

is deactivated.

Putting the cruise control

on standby or switching it

off does not cause a rapid

reduction in speed: you

must brake by depressing the brake

pedal.

Please note that you are

strongly advised to keep

your feet close to the pedals

in order to react in an emer-

gency.

Note: if the speed previously stored is

much higher than the current speed,

the vehicle will accelerate to reach this

threshold.

Under certain conditions (coming up

behind a vehicle moving more slowly,

rapid change of lane of vehicles in

front, etc.), the system may not have

time to respond and may emit a beep

alongside the alert A when the situation

requires the driver’s attention, or the

alert B when the situation requires im-

mediate action from the driver.

React accordingly and perform the ap-

propriate manoeuvres.

2.61

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (6/7)

This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the

due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of the system indications.

The system should under no circumstances be taken to be an obstacle detector or an anti-collision system.

System servicing/repairs

– In the event of an impact, the sensor alignment may become changed, and its operation will consequently be affected.

Deactivate the function, then consult an authorised dealer.

– Any servicing on the bumper (replacement, repair, paint retouching, etc.) should be undertaken by a qualified professional.

Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.

System disturbance

In a complex environment (metal bridge, etc.), the system may be affected.

Risk of inadvertent braking.

2.62

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (7/7)

Limitation of the system operation

– A vehicle travelling in the opposite direction will not trigger any alert or any action on the system operation.

– The sensor area should be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the proper operation of the

system.

– Fixed obstacles (vehicles at a standstill, traffic jams, toll booths, etc.) or objects travelling at low speed or of a small size

(motorbikes, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.) may not be detected by the system.

– A vehicle entering the same lane will only be detected once it has entered the detection zone. Sudden or late braking may

then take place.

– When entering a bend or curve, the sensor may temporarily no longer detect the vehicle in front, and this may lead to ac-

celeration.

– When exiting a curve, the detection of the vehicle in front may be affected or delayed. Sudden or late braking may then take

place.

– A slower vehicle travelling in an adjacent lane may be detected and cause a slowing down if one of the two vehicles is trav-

elling too close to the lane of the other.

– The system is deactivated below around 20 mph (40 km/h). Drivers must react accordingly.

– Sudden changes in situation are not instantly taken into account by the system. Drivers must remain vigilant at all times and

under all circumstances.

Deactivating the function

The function should be deactivated if:

– the brake lights are not functioning;

– the bumper has suffered an impact or damage;

– the vehicle is being towed (breakdowns);

– traffic is heavy;

– the vehicle is travelling in a tunnel;

– the vehicle is travelling on a windy road;

– the vehicle is travelling on a slippery road or in poor weather conditions (fog, snow, rain, side winds, etc.).

If the driver notices abnormal system behaviour, please consult an authorised dealer.

2.63

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (1/4)

Operating principle

Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumper

measure the distance between the ve-

hicle and an obstacle.

This measurement is indicated by

beeps which become more frequent the

closer you come to the obstacle, until

they become a continuous beep when

the vehicle is approximately 20 to

30 centimetres from the obstacle.

The system detects obstacles to the

front, the rear and the sides of the ve-

hicle.

The parking distance control system

is only activated when the vehicle is

driven at a speed below approximately

6 mph (10 km/h).

This function is an addi-

tional aid that indicates the

distance between the vehi-

cle and an obstacle whilst

reversing, using sound signals.

Under no circumstances should it

replace the driver’s care or respon-

sibility whilst reversing.

The driver should always look out

for sudden hazards during driv-

ing: always ensure that there are

no moving obstacles (such as a

child, animal, pram or bicycle, etc.)

or small, narrow objects such as

stones or posts in your path when

manoeuvring.

Special features

Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indi-

cated by arrows 1 are not obscured (by

dirt, mud, snow, etc.).

2.64

Operation

Most objects located less near the

front, rear and sides of the vehicle are

detected.

Depending on the distance of the ob-

stacle, the frequency of the beep will

be higher while approaching it, and will

become a solid beep around 20 cm for

obstacles to the sides, and 30 cm for

obstacles to the front or rear. Green,

orange and red zones will be displayed

on the display C.

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (2/4)

A B

Note: the display 2 shows the vehicle

surroundings and emits beeps.

It is necessary to travel a few metres

before the side detection is activated.

If all areas have a grey background, the

whole area around the vehicle is being

monitored:

– A: analysis of the vehicle surround-

ings in progress;

– B: analysis of the vehicle surround-

ings carried out

2.65

An impact to the under-

side of the vehicle while

manoeuvring (e.g.: stri-

king a post, raised kerb or

other street furniture) may result in

damage to the vehicle (e.g.: defor-

mation of an axle).

To avoid any risk of accident, have

your vehicle checked by an appro-

ved Dealer.

Detection of obstacles to the side

Depending on the direction of the

wheels, the system determines the tra-

jectory of the vehicle and notifies the

driver of any risk or otherwise of a col-

lision with an obstacle 3 to the side of

the vehicle.

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (3/4)

If a side obstacle is detected:

– the beeps become faster and then

sound continuously as the obstacle

gets nearer. Green, orange and red

zones will be displayed on the dis-

play D;

– if there is no risk of collision, no beep

will sound when approaching the ob-

stacle. Green, orange and red zones

will be displayed interspersed on the

display D.

Note: in the event of a change in tra-

jectory during a manoeuvre, the risk of

collision with an obstacles may be sig-

nalled late.

2.66

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (4/4)

When the vehicle is being driven at

a speed below approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h), certain noises (motorcy-

cle, lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may

trigger the beeping sound of the

parking distance control.

Automatic deactivation of the

parking distance control

The system deactivates:

– when the vehicle speed is above ap-

proximately 6 mph (10 km/h);

– depending on the model, when the

vehicle is stationary for more than

approximately 5 seconds and an ob-

stacle is detected (such as when in a

traffic jam, etc.);

– when the vehicle is in neutral for

manual gearboxes, or in position N

or P for automatic gearboxes.

Operating faults

When the system detects an operating

fault, a beep sounds for approximately

3 seconds each time reverse gear is se-

lected and is accompanied by the mes-

sage “Check parking sensor” shown on

the instrument panel. Please consult an

authorised dealer.

Adjustment

You can adjust certain settings from the

multifunction screen 4. Please see the

equipment instructions for further infor-

mation.

Select “Vehicle”, “PARKING ASSIST”,

“Obstacle detection”.

Parking distance control audio

volume

Adjust the volume of the parking dis-

tance control by pressing + or -.

System sound

Enables the system sound to be se-

lected from a choice of 3.

Deactivating the system sound

Activate or deactivate the parking dis-

tance control sound.

Note: If you deactivate the sound, you

will no longer be notified with beeps

when approaching an obstacle.

Deactivating the system

Activate or deactivate parking distance

control.

2.67

REVERSING CAMERA (1/2)

4 moving guide line:

This is shown in blue on the multifunc-

tion screen 2. It indicates the vehicle

trajectory according to the position of

the steering wheel.

Special feature

Make sure that the camera is not ob-

scured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).

Operation

When you change to reverse gear, the

camera 1 located on the tailgate pro-

vides a view of the area behind the

vehicle on the multimedia screen 2,

accompanied by one or two fixed or

moving guide lines 3 and 4.

This system is initially used with the aid

of several gauges (mobile for trajectory

and fixed for distance). When the red

zone is reached, use the bumper image

to stop accurately.

Fixed gauge 3

The fixed clearance gauge comprises

coloured markers A, B and C, indicat-

ing the distance behind the vehicle:

– A (red) approximately 30 centime-

tres from the vehicle;

– B (yellow) approximately 70 centi-

metres from the vehicle;

– C (green) approximately 150 centi-

metres from the vehicle.

This gauge remains fixed and indicates

the vehicle trajectory if the wheels are

in line with the vehicle.

2.68

This function is an additional

aid. It cannot, therefore,

under any circumstances

replace the vigilance or the

responsibility of the driver.

The driver should always look out

for sudden hazards during driving:

always ensure that there are no

moving obstacles (such as a child,

animal, pram, bicycle, etc.) or small,

narrow objects such as stones or

posts in your path when manoeu-

vring.

The screen shows a reverse mirror

image.

The frames are a representation

projected onto flat ground; this in-

formation must not be taken into

account when superimposed on a

vertical object or an object on the

ground.

Objects which appear on the edge

of the screen may be deformed.

In very bright light (snow, vehicle in

sunshine etc.), the camera vision

may be adversely affected.

If the boot is open or poorly closed,

the message “Boot open” appears

and the camera display disappears.

You can also adjust the camera image

settings (brightness, contrast, etc.)

Activating, deactivating the

reversing camera

From the multifunction screen 2, select

“Vehicle”, “Settings”, “Parking as-

sistance”, then “Rear view camera”.

Activate or deactivate the reversing

camera and confirm your choice.

REVERSING CAMERA (2/2)

2.69

ASSISTED PARKING (1/4)

This function assists with parking ma-

noeuvres.

Take your hands off the steering wheel.

You only control the pedals and the

gear lever.

You can retake control at any time by

operating the steering wheel.

Switching on

With the vehicle at a standstill or driv-

ing at less than 6 mph (10 km/h), press

switch 1. The warning light integrated

on switch 1 lights up and the 2 screen

appears on the multifunction screen.

Special features

Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indi-

cated by arrows 3 are not obscured (by

dirt, mud, snow, etc.).

2.70

Choice of manoeuvre

The system can perform four types of

manoeuvres:

– parallel parking;

– perpendicular parking;

– angle parking;

– moving out of a parallel parking

space.

From the multifunction screen, select

the manoeuvre to be performed.

Note: When starting the vehicle, or

after successfully completed parallel

parking using the system, the default

manoeuvre proposed by the system is

assistance in exiting a parallel parking

space. In other cases, the default ma-

noeuvre can be set from the multifunc-

tion screen.

ASSISTED PARKING (2/4)

Operation

Parking

As long as the vehicle speed is less

than 20 mph (30 km/h), the system

looks for available parking spaces on

both sides of the vehicle.

Once a space has been found, it is dis-

played on the multifunction screen, indi-

cated by a small letter “P”. Drive slowly,

with the indicators activated on the side

of the space, until the message “Stop”

is displayed, alongside a beep.

The space is then indicated on the mul-

tifunction screen by a capital “P”.

– Stop the vehicle;

– select reverse gear.

Warning light

 lights up on the in-

strument panel, along with a beep.

– release the steering wheel;

– follow the system instructions pro-

vided on the multifunction screen.

Your speed should not exceed around

4 mph (7 km/h).

Once the warning light  on the

instrument panel goes off and a beep

sounds, the manoeuvre has been com-

pleted.

2.71

ASSISTED PARKING (3/4)

Your speed should not exceed around

4 mph (7 km/h).

Once in position to exit the space, the

system will notify you of the end of the

manoeuvre.

Once the warning light

 on the

instrument panel goes off and a beep

sounds, the manoeuvre has been com-

pleted.

Suspending the manoeuvre

The manoeuvre is suspended in the fol-

lowing circumstances:

– you take control of the wheel;

– a door or the boot is opened;

– the vehicle is at a standstill for too

long;

– an obstacle in the direction of move-

ment prevents the manoeuvre from

being completed;

– the engine will stop.

Once the warning light

 on the

instrument panel goes off and a beep

sounds, the manoeuvre has been sus-

pended. Then to resume the manoeu-

vre, press and hold the system activa-

tion switch.

In this case, the reason for suspending

the manoeuvre will be displayed on the

multifunction screen.

Make sure:

– you have released the steering wheel

and;

– that all doors and the boot are closed,

and;

– that no obstacles are in the way of

the direction of movement, and;

– that the engine is started.

Cancelling the manoeuvre

The manoeuvre can be stopped in the

following cases:

– by pressing the system activation

switch;

– the vehicle speed has exceeded

4 mph (7 km/h);

– You have performed more than ten

forwards/backwards movements in

one manoeuvre;

– the parking distance control sensors

are dirty or blocked;

– the vehicle wheels have skidded.

Once the warning light

 on the

instrument panel goes off and a beep

sounds, the manoeuvre has been

ended.

Exiting a parallel parking space

– Select “exit parallel parking space”

mode;

– activate the direction indicator on the

side you wish to go out of;

– press and hold switch 1 (around

2 seconds).

Warning light

 lights up on the in-

strument panel, along with a beep.

– release the steering wheel;

– go forwards and backwards using

the parking distance control system

alerts.

2.72

ASSISTED PARKING (4/4)

This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the

due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

Make sure that the manoeuvre complies with the applicable traffic regulations at your location.

– The driver should always look out for sudden hazards during driving: always ensure that there are no moving obstacles

(such as a child, animal, pram, bicycle, etc.) or small, narrow objects such as stones or posts in your path when manoeu-

vring.

– The system cannot detect objects located in the sensor blind spots.

– During manoeuvring, the steering wheel may turn quickly: do not place your hands inside the wheel, and ensure nothing is

located in this space.

– Always visually check that the parking space proposed by the system is still available and contains no obstacles.

– The system should be deactivated when towing a trailer.

2.73

ADAPTIVE SUSPENSION

Adaptive suspension makes it possible

to modify the suspension automatically,

according to driving conditions and to

your driving style.

Choosing a preset mode

From the menu on the multifunction

screen 1, you can select a preset driv-

ing mode.

The configuration of the suspension will

depend on the mode selected in the

“Multi-Sense” menu (please refer to the

information on “Multi-Sense” in

Section 3).

Operating fault

In the event of a fault, the system

switches automatically to the “Neutral”

mode in “Multi-Sense”.

If the message “Check Damper control”

appears on the instrument panel, con-

sult an authorised dealer.

2.74

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (1/6)

Grid B on the instrument

panel

– The current gear is given in zone 5;

– The available functions are provided

in the ambient colour chosen by the

driver;

– Unavailable functions are greyed

out, except for position P 4 which

disappears from the grid above

2 mph (3 km/h).

Gear selector 3 position

grid A

1: selector rest position

2: button P: Park

R: reverse

N: neutral (park)

D: automatic mode

+: Manually moving up a gear

–: Manually moving down a gear

2.75

To engage neutral

With the vehicle at a standstill, engine

running, depress the brake pedal and

move the selector 3 to the left:

– hold in place for about a second until

a white N is displayed on the instru-

ment panel, then release;

– release immediately.

Note: If the current gear is R or D, it

is not necessary to depress the brake

pedal to engage position N.

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (2/6)

To engage position P

(button 2)

With the vehicle at a standstill, engine

running or ignition on, press button 2 to

engage position P. The warning light for

button 2 lights up orange once the Park

position on the gearbox is engaged.

Check that warning light P

on the instrument panel and

the warning light integrated

on the button 2 are acti-

vated before leaving the vehicle.

Risk of loss of immobilisation of the

vehicle

To disengage position P

(button 2)

With the vehicle at a standstill, engine

running, depress the brake pedal and

move the selector to the desired posi-

tion R, N or D.

If the brake pedal is not fully depressed,

the message “Push brake pedal” the

warning light



are displayed on the

instrument panel.

When position R or D is disengaged,

N is displayed on the instrument panel

and the warning light on button 2 goes

out.

Note:

– If the driver opens their door to leave

the vehicle while position P has not

been engaged, a beep sounds and

the message “P not engaged” is dis-

played on the instrument panel.

– Warning light



comes on each

time it is necessary to depress the

brake pedal to change the position

of the automatic gearbox.

In the event of the mes-

sage “Check auto gearbox”,

“Automatic gearbox posi-

tion P defective” or “Electric

failure DANGER”, or in the event of

a battery fault, immobilise the ve-

hicle using the electronic parking

brake.

2.76

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (3/6)

Driving in automatic mode

With the vehicle at a standstill, engine

running, position P, N or R, depress the

brake pedal and move the selector to

the left then back, and release.

If one of the conditions is not applied,

D flashes for around 5 seconds and

the message “Push brake pedal” is dis-

played on the instrument panel for ap-

proximately 15 seconds.

In most road conditions you will en-

counter, you will not need to touch your

lever again: the gears will change au-

tomatically at the right time and at the

most suitable engine speed because

the automatic system takes into ac-

count the vehicle load and road contour

and adjusts itself to the particular driv-

ing style you have chosen.

Note: With the engine running and

the vehicle travelling between 0 and

6 mph (0 and 10 km/h), position N or

R, it is not necessary to depress the

brake pedal to engage position D. This

is useful during parking manoeuvres

requiring a number of alternate forward

and reverse movements.

Economical driving

When driving, always leave the lever

in position D, keeping the accelerator

pedal lightly depressed to ensure auto-

matic gear changes at a lower engine

speed.

Accelerating and overtaking

Depress the accelerator pedal briskly

and fully (so that it goes beyond the

point of resistance).

It is also possible to change down at

any time for overtaking purposes, by

pushing the selector to position “-”.

To select reverse gear

With the vehicle at a standstill, engine

running, position P, N or D, depress the

brake pedal and move the selector to

the left then forwards, and release.

If the brake pedal is not depressed, a

beep will sound, the display of position

R flashes for around 5 seconds in the

grid shown on the instrument panel,

and a message “Push brake pedal” is

displayed for around 15 seconds.

Note: With the engine running, and

the vehicle travelling between 0 and

6 mph (0 and 10 km/h), position N or

D, it is not necessary to depress the

brake pedal to engage R. This is useful

during parking manoeuvres requiring

a number of alternate forward and re-

verse movements.

2.77

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (4/6)

Driving in manual mode

Driving in temporary manual mode

Temporary manual mode can only be

selected when automatic mode D has

been engaged and the vehicle speed

is over around 6 mph (10 km/h).

Once D engaged, move the selector 3:

– to the rear +, to request a higher

gear;

– forwards -, to request a lower gear.

The gear selected is displayed to the

right of D on the instrument panel.

Special cases

Under certain driving conditions (e.g.

engine protection, electronic stability

program (ESP) operational etc.: ESC)

etc.) the system can change the gear

automatically.

The requested gear will be maintained

for a period set by the system, based

on the gradient and the driving style.

The system will take over once this

period has elapsed and may then trig-

ger an automatic gear change.

Likewise, to prevent incorrect manoeu-

vres, a gear change may be refused

by the system: in this case the gear dis-

play + or - flashes for a few seconds as

a warning, along with a beep.

Driving in permanent manual mode

Permanent manual mode can only be

selected when automatic mode D has

previously been engaged and the vehi-

cle speed is greater than around 6 mph

(10 km/h).

Once D engaged, move and hold the

selector 3 for around 1 second:

– to the rear +, to request a higher

gear;

– forwards - to request a lower gear.

The gear engaged is first displayed to

the right of D on the instrument panel,

then M followed by the gear engaged

appear under + once permanent

manual mode is activated.

To exit permanent manual mode and

return to automatic mode, move the se-

lector to D.

Any other request for an available gear,

P or R or N will exit permanent manual

mode.

2.78

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (5/6)

Special cases

As position P is automatically en-

gaged when the engine is stopped, it is

sometimes necessary to place the vehi-

cle in position N for some car washes,

for example.

Position N can be engaged before

opening the driver’s door, and a maxi-

mum of around 25 seconds after the

engine is stopped.

After this time or after opening the

driver’s door, it will be necessary to turn

on the ignition again to disengage posi-

tion P.

In the event of a loss of in-

formation on the instrument

panel, stop and immobilise

the vehicle using the elec-

tronic parking brake or button P.

Special cases

In certain driving cases (eg: protect-

ing the engine), a gear change can be

performed automatically in the event of

over-revving or approaching under-rev-

ving. Permanent manual mode remains

activated. Similarly, to avoid making the

"wrong move", a gear change may be

refused by the gearbox. In this case,

the display for the requested gear + or –

flashes for a few seconds to warn you.

Parking the vehicle

Upon stopping the engine by press-

ing the engine stop button, position P

is automatically engaged, along with

the electronic parking brake for vehi-

cles equipped with this device. P is dis-

played on the instrument panel and the

warning light on button P comes on.

Never leave the vehicle with

the engine running without

previously engaging the

Park position P.

With the engine running, the automatic

gearbox in D or R or N or M and with-

out your foot on the brake, messages

“P not engaged” and “Select P” are dis-

played on the instrument panel as soon

as the driver’s door is open.

With the engine stopped, the automatic

gearbox in N (neutral), the message “P

not engaged” is displayed on the instru-

ment panel.

Special feature related to the Stop and Start function: if you are going to unfasten the driver's seat belt before the

engine goes into standby due to the Stop and Start function, make sure the gearbox is in position P. The P warning

light will light up on the instrument panel to confirm this. Risk of loss of immobilisation.

2.79

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (6/6)

Special circumstances

– If the bends and road surface

do not allow you to stay in auto-

matic mode (e.g. in the mountains),

we recommend that you change

to either temporary or permanent

manual mode.

This will prevent the automatic gear-

box from changing gear repeatedly

when climbing, and permit engine

braking on long descents.

– In cold weather, wait a few seconds

before disengaging position P or N

and engage the lever in D or R to

prevent the engine stalling.

Operating faults

– When driving, if the “Check auto

gearbox” message appears on the

instrument panel, it indicates a fault.

Contact your approved Dealer as

soon as possible.

– When driving, if the message

“Gearbox overheating” appears on

the instrument panel, stop the ve-

hicle to allow the gearbox to cool

down.

Contact your approved Dealer as

soon as possible.

– If a vehicle with an automatic

gearbox breaks down, please refer

to the information on “Towing” in

Section 5.

An impact to the under-

side of the vehicle while

manoeuvring (e.g.: strik-

ing a post, raised kerb or

other street furniture) may result in

damage to the vehicle (e.g.: defor-

mation of an axle).

To avoid any risk of accident, have

your vehicle checked by an ap-

proved Dealer.

In very cold weather, the system

may prevent the gears from being

shifted in manual mode until the

gearbox reaches the right tempera-

ture.

2.80

3.1

Section 3: Your comfort

multi-Sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4

Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7

Additional heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12

Air conditioning: information and advice on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15

Electric sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17

Fixed glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19

Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20

Sun visor/blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22

Passenger compartment storage/fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23

Accessories socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28

Headrests - Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29

Luggage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35

Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36

Luggage compartment storage space and fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37

Transporting objects in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38

Transporting objects: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39

Luggage net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40

Roof bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42

Multimedia equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43

3.2

MULTI-SENSE (1/2)

The Multi-Sense system enables once

of five modes to be selected which, de-

pending on the vehicle, affect the drive,

the light environment, the comfort and

the engine noise:

– modes Comfort, Neutral, Eco and

Sport are preset and associated with

customisable light environments and

engine noise;

– mode Perso is fully customisable.

The drive modes affect the:

– power-assisted steering;

– piloted suspension damping;

– four-wheel drive;

– engine and gearbox responsiveness;

– heating level.

They also affect the:

– passenger compartment and instru-

ment panel lighting;

– instrument panel and multifunction

screen information;

– engine noise;

– massage seat.

After each start-up, the vehicle uses the

mode set at the time the engine was

last switched off.

Mode Comfort

This mode favours flexibility in the sus-

pension and steering. The interior envi-

ronment is softened.

Mode Neutral

Default mode, mode Neutral selects the

vehicle factory settings.

Mode Eco

Mode Eco is geared towards saving

energy and the environment. The sus-

pension and steering are soft, engine

and gearbox management enable fuel

consumption to be lowered. Air con-

ditioning is managed to be used only

when necessary.

Please refer to the information on

“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in

Section 2.

Multi-Sense

Sport

Eco

Neutral

Comfort Perso

In all modes, it is possible to change

the colour of the ambient lighting as

well as the format of the information

displayed on the instrument panel

and multifunction display.

You can also reset to the default set-

tings.

3.3

MULTI-SENSE (2/2)

Accessing the menu

You can access Multi-Sense:

– from the multifunction screen 1.

Select menu “Vehicle” then “Multi-

Sense”;

– using switch 2;

– using button Eco 3 which automati-

cally launches Eco mode and opens

the 'Multi-Sense' menu on the multi-

function screen 1 for a few seconds.

Sport mode

This mode allows greater responsive-

ness from the engine and gearbox,

making the suspension and steering

firmer.

Mode Perso

This mode enables you to manually

configure the drive, light environment

and, depending on the vehicle, the

comfort and engine noise.

Depending on the vehicle, once the

“Multi-Sense” menu is displayed on

the multifunction screen 1, pressing

switch 2 enables you to move between

the two preferential modes you have

selected. Refer to the handbook for the

equipment.

Stopping the engine in Sport

mode, or Perso mode with engine

setting in Sport mode.

When you restart the vehicle, a mes-

sage asks you if you wish to keep

the engine setting in Sportmode.

3.4

AIR VENTS: air outlets (1/3)

1 left-hand air vent

2 windscreen demisting vents

3 centre air vents

4 side window demister outlets

5 right-hand air vent

6 2nd row passenger air vent

7 3rd row passenger air vent

8 passenger footwell heater outlets

9 Additional air conditioning control

10 multifunction screen

3.5

To remove bad odours from your ve-

hicles, only use the systems designed

for this purpose. Consult an approved

Dealer.

AIR VENTS: air outlets (2/3)

Front seats

Direction

Right/left: turn knob 2.

To fully close, turn beyond the point of

resistance.

Up/down: lower or raise tabs 1.

Do not add anything to the

vehicle’s ventilation circuit

(for example, to remove

bad odours).

There is a risk of damage or of

fire.

3.6

AIR VENTS: air outlets (3/3)

2nd row rear seats

Right/left direction

Move air vent 4.

Up/down direction

Move cursor 3.

3rd row rear seats

Right/left direction

Move air vent 6.

Front/rear direction

Move cursor 5.

3.7

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (1/5)

The controls

Press zone 14 to access the multifunc-

tion screen controls 1. The presence of

the controls detailed below will depend

on the vehicle model.

2 and 7 Left and right temperature indi-

cation adjustment.

3 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen

and, depending on the vehicle, the

door mirrors.

4, 8, 9 and 10 automatic modes

5 Air recirculation.

6 “Clear View” function.

11 and 18 Ventilation speeds.

12 Passenger compartment air distri-

bution.

13 Right and left temperature display.

14 Zone displaying air conditioning set-

tings.

15 “DUAL” function.

16 “Automatic recirculation” function.

17 Air conditioning.

19 Stopping the system.

Automatic mode

The automatic climate control system

guarantees comfort in the passen-

ger compartment and good visibility

(except in the event of extreme condi-

tions), while optimising consumption.

The system controls the ventilation

speed, air distribution, air recirculation,

and starting and stopping the air condi-

tioning and air temperature.

This mode consists of a choice of three

programmes:

NORMAL: allows the selected comfort

level to be best attained, depending on

the exterior conditions. Press button 4

or key 9.

SOFT: gently brings the temperature

to the desired comfort level. The com-

fort level is then maintained gently and

silently. Press button 8.

FAST: emphasises the actions of the

system to reach the desired comfort

level more quickly. Press button 10.

Some buttons have a warning light

indicating their operative state.

3.8

Varying the ventilation speed

In automatic mode, the system uses

the most suitable amount of air to reach

and maintain the desired comfort level.

You can still adjust the ventilation speed

by pressing buttons 11 or 18 or by slid-

ing your finger in zone A.

In this case, the ventilation speed,

which is no longer controlled automati-

cally, appears in zone A and zone 14.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (2/5)

Temperature adjustment

There are two types of settings:

– uniform passenger compartment

setting;

– DUAL function setting to independ-

ently adjust the left and right sides.

Uniform passenger compartment

setting

Use control 7.

DUAL function setting

Press button 15 to activate. Use con-

trol 7 to adjust the left side and control 2

for the right side.

The displayed temperature values

show a comfort level.

When starting the engine, increas-

ing or decreasing the value dis-

played will not allow the com-

fort level to be reached any more

quickly. The system will always op-

timise the temperature increase or

decrease (the ventilation system

does not start instantly at maximum

speed: it gradually increases). This

may take several minutes.

Generally speaking, unless there is

a particular reason not to, the dash-

board air vents should remain open.

Note: The air conditioning configura-

tion depends on the mode selected on

the “Multi-Sense” menu (please refer

to the information in “Multi-Sense” in

Section 3).

3.9

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (3/5)

Press button 6 – the integrated indica-

tor light comes on.

Press button 3 to stop the heated rear

screen operating, and the integrated in-

dicator goes out.

To adjust the ventilation speed: press

buttons 11 or 18 or slide your finger in

zone A.

Clear View function

This function quickly demists and de-

ices the windscreen, the rear screen,

the front side windows, and the door

mirrors (depending on the vehicle). It

imposes automatic operation of the

air conditioning and rear screen de-ic-

ing and, depending on the vehicle, the

windscreen electric de-icer.

To exit this function, press:

– button 4;

– again button 6;

– on button 8, 9 or 10.

3.10

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (4/5)

Switching air conditioning on

or off

In automatic mode, the system switches

the air conditioning system on or off,

depending on the climate conditions.

Press button 17 to:

– activate the air conditioning (a warn-

ing light in zone 14 comes on).

– deactivate the air conditioning (the

warning light in zone 14 goes out)

Stopping the system

Press button 19 to activate or deacti-

vate the system (the operating warn-

ing light on button 19 notifies you of the

system status).

It is preferable to use one of the automatic programmes NORMAL, SOFT or

FAST.

In automatic mode (4 warning light is lit), all air conditioning functions are control-

led by the system.

You can still change the system selection. In this case, the warning light on the

button 4 will go out and the changed function, which is no longer controlled by the

system, will be shown on the display.

To return to automatic mode, press one of programmes NORMAL, SOFT, or

FAST, or button 4.

Rear screen de-icing/

demisting

Press button 3 – the integrated indica-

tor light comes on. This function en-

ables rapid demisting or de-icing of the

rear screen and de-icing of the door

mirrors (on equipped vehicles).

To exit this function, press button 3

again. Demisting automatically stops.

3.11

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (5/5)

Automatic usage

Press button 16 (a warning light comes

on in zone 14).

Manual use

Press button 5 to force air recirculation.

Prolonged use of this position may lead

to odours, caused by non-renewal of

air, and the formation of condensation

on the windows.

We advise you to return to automatic

mode as soon as air recirculation is no

longer needed, by pressing key 16 or

button 5 again.

To exit this function, press key 16 or

button 5 again.

Adjusting the distribution

of air in the passenger

compartment

Press buttons 12 to select the desired

distribution (a warning light is displayed

in zone 14):

The air flow is mainly directed

to the demisting vents for the

windscreen and the side windows.

The air flow is mainly directed

to the dashboard air vents.

The air flow is directed mainly

towards the footwells.

The demisting/de-icing will still take

priority over the air recirculation.

Air recirculation

This function is managed automatically

but you can also activate it manually.

Note:

– during recirculation, air is taken from

the passenger compartment and

is recycled, with no air being taken

from outside the vehicle;

– air recirculation allows the exter-

nal atmosphere to be cut off (when

driving in polluted areas, etc.) and

to cool the passenger compartment

temperature more quickly.

3.12

ADDITIONAL AIR CONDITIONING (1/2)

Control

The additional air conditioning powers

the air vents 3 in the third row to add

to the heating level of the second and

third rows.

It only operates on the flow of cold air

blown into the passenger compartment.

It can be activated or deactivated

using the buttons on the multifunction

screen 1, or by the rear control panel 2.

The air conditioning system is used for:

– lowering the temperature inside the

passenger compartment;

– eliminating condensation more

quickly.

3.13

ADDITIONAL AIR CONDITIONING (2/2)

Switching on or off

From the multifunction screen, press

button 4.

Mode AUTO

Press button 6. The system uses the

most suitable amount of air to reach

and maintain the desired comfort level.

Mode OFF

Press button 5 to deactivate the func-

tion.

Note: For these two modes, the rear

control 2 is locked and the warning

light 9 is displayed for notification.

FAST:Turn the control to 10.

Enables the system to reach the de-

sired comfort level more quickly.

OFF: Turn the control to 12.

Enables the additional air-conditioning

to be deactivated.

Adjusting the ventilation

speed.

Turn the control 2 to move the marker 8

to zone A.

Mode MANUAL

Press button 7 to activate. The rear

control 2 is then operational and the

warning light 9 goes out.

From the rear control panel 2, move the

marker 8 to:

AUTO: Turn the control to 11. Enables

the optimal comfort level.

3.14

AIR CONDITIONING: information and advice on use

Do not add anything to the

vehicle’s ventilation circuit

(for example, to remove

bad odours).

There is a risk of damage or of

fire.

Do not open the refriger-

ant fluid circuit. The fluid

may damage eyes or skin.

Fuel consumption

You will normally notice an increase in

fuel consumption (especially in town)

when the air conditioning is operating.

For vehicles fitted with air conditioning

with no automatic mode, switch off the

system when it is not required.

Advice for reducing consumption

and helping to preserve the environ-

ment

Drive with the air vents open and the

windows closed.

If the vehicle has been parked in the

sun, open the doors for a few moments

to let the hot air escape before starting

the engine.

Maintenance

Refer to the Maintenance Document

for your vehicle for the inspection fre-

quency.

Operating faults

As a general rule, contact your ap-

proved dealer in the event of an oper-

ating fault.

– Reduction in de-icing, demisting

or air conditioning performance.

This may be caused by the passen-

ger compartment filter cartridge be-

coming clogged.

– No cold air is being produced.

Check that the controls are set cor-

rectly and that the fuses are sound.

Otherwise, switch off the system.

Presence of water under the

vehicle

After prolonged use of the air condi-

tioning system, it is normal for water

to be present under the vehicle. This is

caused by condensation.

Advice on use

In some situations, (air conditioning

off, air recirculation activated, ventila-

tion speed at zero or low, etc.) you may

notice that condensation starts to form

on the windows and windscreen.

If there is condensation, use the “Clear

View” function to remove it, then use

the air conditioning in automatic mode

to stop it forming again.

Vehicles equipped with the

ECOmode: once activated, ECO

mode can reduce the perform-

ance of the automatic air condition-

ing. Please refer to the information

on “Driving advice, Eco-driving” in

Section 2.

3.15

ELECTRIC WINDOWS (1/2)

These systems operate:

– with the engine running;

– with the ignition off until one of the

front doors is opened (limited to ap-

proximately 12 minutes).

– before starting, with the front doors

closed, after pressing the start

button.

Press the window switch down or pull it

up to lower or raise the window to the

desired height: the rear windows do not

open fully.

Safety of rear occupants

The driver can disable operation of the rear electric windows and doors

by pressing switch 4. A confirmation message is displayed on the instru-

ment panel.

Driver’s responsibility

Never leave your vehicle with the RENAULT card inside and never leave a child

(or a pet) unsupervised, even for a short while. They may pose a risk to them-

selves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the elec-

tric windows or by locking the doors. If a body part gets trapped, reverse the direc-

tion of travel of the window as soon as possible by pressing the relevant switch.

Risk of serious injury.

Avoid resting any objects against

a half-open window: there is a risk

that the electric window could be

damaged.

From the driver’s seat, use switch:

1 for the driver’s side;

2 for the front passenger side;

3 and 5 for the rear passenger win-

dows.

From the passenger seats, use

switch 6.

Note: if the window detects resistance

when closing (e.g.: fingers, branch of

a tree, etc.) it stops and then lowers

again by a few centimetres.

3.16

Operating faults

In case of a fault when closing a

window, the system reverts to normal

mode: pull the switch as many times as

necessary until the window closes com-

pletely, hold the switch (still on the clo-

sing side) for around one second, then

completely lower then raise the window

to reset the system.

If necessary, contact an approved

Dealer.

ELECTRIC WINDOWS (2/2)

Remote control window

closing

(vehicles with 4 one-touch electric win-

dows).

When you lock the doors from the out-

side, press the locking button on the

RENAULTcard twice in quick suc-

cession, or on the driver’s door in

hands-free mode, and all the windows

will close automatically (and, depen-

ding on the vehicle, the sunroof).

It is recommended that the user only

operates the system when the vehi-

cle can be seen clearly and no one is

inside.

Closing windows can cause

serious injury.

One-touch mode

This mode works in addition to the ope-

ration of the electric windows described

previously.

Briefly press or pull the window switch

fully: the window is fully lowered or

raised. Pressing the switch again stops

the window moving.

3.17

ELECTRIC SUNROOF (1/3)

To slide the curtain 1

With the ignition on:

– Full opening: move marker 3 on

button 2 to position A. The points in

between correspond to the progres-

sive opening positions of the curtain;

– to close: move mark 3 on button 2

to position 0.

To slide the sunroof

With the ignition on:

– to open: move mark 3 on button 2

to position B, depending how far

you wish it to open. The points in be-

tween correspond to the progressive

opening positions;

– To close: move the marker 3 on

button 2 to position A.

Moving the position 0 directly to po-

sition B causes the simultaneous

opening of the curtain and the roof.

Driver’s responsibility

Never leave your vehicle

with the RENAULT card

inside and never leave a

child (or a pet) unsupervised, even

for a short while.

They may pose a risk to themselves

or to others by starting the engine,

activating equipment such as the

electric windows or by locking the

doors.

If something gets trapped, reverse

the direction of travel as soon as

possible by turning button 2 fully to

the right (position B).

Risk of serious injury.

Special features

Pressing button 2 allows the curtain to

be automatically positioned depending

on the position of the sunroof.

Pressing button 2 when the roof and

the curtain are in the same opening po-

sition enables the curtain to be opened

fully.

3.18

ELECTRIC SUNROOF (2/3)

Closing the sunroof by

remote control

(depending on the vehicle)

If you press the locking button on

the card twice in quick succession

RENAULT,, the windows and the elec-

tric sunroof will close automatically.

It is recommended that the user only

operates the system when the vehi-

cle can be seen clearly and no one is

inside.

Precautions during use

– Vehicle with loaded roof bars.

As a general rule, if there is a load

on the roof, use of the sunroof is not

recommended.

Before using the sunroof, check the

objects and/or accessories (bike

racks, roof boxes, etc.) attached to

the roof bars: they should be prop-

erly arranged and secured and

should not interfere with the opera-

tion of the sunroof.

Contact an approved dealer for de-

tails of possible conversions;

– check that the sunroof is properly

closed before leaving your vehicle;

– clean the seal every three months

using products recommended by our

Technical Department;

– do not open the sunroof immedi-

ately after it has rained or immedi-

ately after washing the vehicle.

Closing the sunroof can

cause severe injuries.

Special features

If the window detects resistance when

closing (e.g.: arms, branch of a tree,

etc.) it stops and then lowers again by a

few centimetres.

After closing the sunroof by remote

control, pressing button 2 allows the

sunroof to return to its previous posi-

tion.

3.19

Operating fault

– If the sunroof will not close, turn

switch 2 to position B to open the

sunroof, then turn switch 2 to posi-

tion 0 until the sunroof is completely

closed.

– If the curtain does not close, turn

switch 2 to position A to open the

curtain, then turn switch 2 to posi-

tion 0 until the curtain is fully closed.

ELECTRIC SUNROOF (3/3)/FIXED GLASS SUNROOF

If the blockage persists, keep switch 2

pressed until it closes completely.

Please consult an authorised dealer.

Fixed glass roof

Opening the blind

Press the top of handle 4.

Closing the blind

Pull handle 4 until it clicks in the lock.

If the blind becomes skewed when

opening or closing, close fully and then

fully open the blind.

3.20

When the doors or boot are un-

locked and opened, the reading and

footwell lights come on temporarily.

Map reading lights

Press switch 1 to get:

– permanent lighting;

– immediate switching off.

From the multifunction screen, it is pos-

sible to deactivate/activate the cour-

tesy lights upon opening the doors or

the boot. To do this, please refer to

“Vehicle settings customisation menu”

in Section 1.

INTERIOR LIGHTING (1/2)

3.21

Boot lights

Light 4 comes on when the boot is

opened.

Storage drawer light

Light 3 comes on when the storage

drawer is opened.

INTERIOR LIGHTING (2/2)

Door lights

Light 2 comes on when the door is

opened.

3.22

SUN VISOR, BLINDS

Front sun visor

Lower the sun visor 1 on the wind-

screen or unclip it and lower it over the

side window.

Vanity mirror

Lift the cover 2.

The light 3 switches on automatically.

Lateral sun visor

Pull the sun visor up by tab 4 until

hooks 5 engage in their housings (make

sure the hooks are properly locked in

position).

When driving, ensure the

courtesy mirror cover is

closed. Risk of injury.

3.23

Dashboard storage

compartment 2

Door pockets 1

It can hold a 1.5 litre bottle.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE/FITTINGS (1/5)

Nothing should be placed

on the floor area in front of

the driver as such objects

may slide under the pedal

during braking manoeuvres, thus

obstructing its use.

Ensure that no hard, heavy

or pointed objects are

placed in the “open” stor-

age compartments in such

a way that they may fall onto pas-

sengers during sudden turning or

braking.

Passenger storage drawer 3

To open, move your fingers into area 4-

it will open by itself. If on a steep slope,

assist the drawer opening by pulling

handle 5. It can hold A4 documents. It

is ventilated and refrigerated.

Maximum load allowed in the pas-

senger storage compartment: 6 kg,

evenly distributed.

When driving, ensure

that the storage drawer is

closed. Risk of injury.

3.24

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE/FITTINGS (2/5)

Central storage

compartment 11

Slide the curtain 12 to open the storage

compartment.

Depending on the vehicle, this may be

used to hold a removable cup-holder.

Cup holders 6 and 9

Storage compartment 7

Storage compartments 8

and 10

When turning corners, accelerating or braking, ensure that the receptacle

being held by the cup holder is not dislodged.

There is a risk of burning if hot liquid escapes.

3.25

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE/FITTINGS (3/5)

Centre console storage

compartment 14

Lift up the armrest 13.

Grab handle 15

This offers support and can be held

when the vehicle is being driven.

Do not use it for getting into or out of

the vehicle.

Clothes hooks 16

3.26

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE/FITTINGS (4/5

Ensure that no hard, heavy

or pointed objects are

placed in the “open” stor-

age compartments in such

a way that they may fall onto pas-

sengers during sudden turning or

braking.

Storage drawer 18 under the

centre console

Rear door storage

compartment 17

Nothing should be placed

on the floor area in front of

the driver as such objects

may slide under the pedal

during braking manoeuvres, thus

obstructing its use.

Front seat storage pockets 19

3.27

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE/FITTINGS (5/5)

Rear parcel shelf 20

Flap under the feet of the

right rear passenger 21

This location houses the tool kit. Please

refer to the information on “Tools” in

Section 5.

3.28

ASHTRAY/CIGAR LIGHTER/ACCESSORIES SOCKET

Ashtray location 1

Cigarette lighter 2

With the ignition on, push in the ciga-

rette lighter 2 - it will spring back with a

click when it is ready. Pull it out to use.

After use, replace it without pushing it

all the way in.

Accessories sockets

You can use the one of sockets 2. They

are designed for connecting acces-

sories with a maximum power rating

of 120 Watts (voltage: 12V) which

have been approved by our Technical

Department.

Connect accessories

with a maximum power of

120 Watts only.

Fire hazard.

If your vehicle is not fitted with a

cigar lighter and an ashtray, these

can be obtained from an authorised

dealer.

3.29

Centre seat headrest 2

storage position

Press tab 1 and lower the headrest

completely.

When the headrest is set at the

lowest position, this is for storage

only. It should not be in this position

when a seat is occupied.

REAR HEADRESTS

Position for use

Lift the headrest to maximum height,

then lower it until it locks.

To remove the headrest

Press the tab(s) 1, then remove the

headrest.

To refit the headrest

Insert the rods into the holes, press

tab 1 and lower the headrest.

The headrest is a safety

component; check that it is

fitted and in the correct po-

sition. The top of the head-

rest should be as close as possible

to the top of the head.

3.30

Heated seats

(depending on vehicle)

Side seats only

With the ignition on:

– Pressing the switch 3 on the required

seat for the first time activates the

heating system on high. Both inte-

grated switch warning lights come

on;

– pressing the switch for the second

time changes the heating to low. One

integrated warning light comes on;

– pressing for the third time turns the

heating off.

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is stationary.

The rear seats are separate seats.

To move the seats forwards or

backwards

Lift lever 1 to unlock the seat. Once in

the desired position, release the lever

and check that the seat is correctly

locked.

To tilt the seatback

Lift handle 2 and tilt the seatback to the

desired position.

Release the handle 2 and ensure that

the seatback is fully locked into posi-

tion.

REAR SEATS (1/5)

Operating faults

When an operating fault is detected,

the integrated warning lights on the

switch 3 for the seat concerned flash.

Consult an approved dealer.

3.31

REAR SEATS (2/5)

When moving the rear

seats:

– check that no one is near

to any of the moving parts;

– check that there is sufficient

space around the seat;

– check that nothing is obstructing

the section of the boot reserved

for storing the seat;

For safety reasons, carry out any

adjustments when the vehicle is sta-

tionary.

When moving the rear

seats, ensure that nothing

obstructs the anchorage

points (passenger’s arm or

leg, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).

To unfold a seat in the second row

Hold the seatback, lift it up and ensure

it is correctly locked in place.

To unfold a seat in the third row

– Lift the handle 5 of one of the sec-

ond-row seats to access the third-

row seats;

– place seat belt in hook 4 to avoid

damaging it;

– hold the seatback, lift it up and

ensure it is correctly locked in place.

To access the third row rear seats

– Lift handle 5, the seat slides forward;

– sit in the third row rear seat;

– pull the second row rear seat to put it

into position.

– Make sure the seat is correctly

locked in position.

3.32

REAR SEATS (3/5)

To automatically fold down

the seats (flat position)

The rear seats are electrically unlocked

to fold down in order to create a flat

floor.

There are two ways to manoeuvre the

seats:

– from the boot using control 6;

– from the multifunction screen 7.

Disabling the function

– With the engine running, a buckled

seat belt prevents the movement of

the relevant seat.

– Once the vehicle is moving the two

controls are deactivated.

Conditions of use

With the vehicle at a standstill and the

rear seat belts unlocked:

– from control 6, with the boot lid open;

– from the multifunction screen, with

the engine running.

Note:

All unlocking actions for folding down

the seats require that the trays on the

back of the front seats have already

been folded away.

3.33

REAR SEATS (4/5)

From the multifunction screen 7

With the vehicle at a standstill, select

menu “Vehicle”, “Seats” then “One-

touch folding”.

Press on the seat you wish to fold away,

or on all seats, then confirm.

Encountering an obstacle

While being moved, if a seat encoun-

ters an obstacle, the movement stops

of its own accord. You will then have

to manually fold back the seat after re-

moving the obstacle.

Operating fault

If all user conditions have been ful-

filled and the folding action still fails to

operate, please contact an authorised

dealer.

When moving the rear

seats, ensure that nothing

obstructs the anchorage

points (passenger’s arm or

leg, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).

One-touch folding

All

Fold

Using control 6

Depending on the vehicle, folding

switches for:

A the rear left seat in the second row.

B central rear seat in the second row.

C the rear right seat in the second row.

D the rear right seat in the third row.

E the rear left seat in the third row.

F all seats.

3.34

Use restriction

It is not permitted to drive with a second

row rear seatback or seat folded down

when there is a passenger occupying a

third row rear seat.

The label located on the back of the

seats reminds you of this.

REAR SEATS (5/5)

For safety reasons, carry

out any adjustments when

the vehicle is stationary.

When moving the rear

seats, ensure that nothing

obstructs the anchorage

points (passenger’s arm or

leg, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).

When refitting the seat-

back, make sure it is cor-

rectly locked in place.

If seat covers are fitted,

make sure these do not prevent the

seatback latch from locking in.

Make sure that the seat belts are

positioned correctly.

Reposition the headrests.

3.35

TAILGATE

Manual controls

To open

Press button 1 and lift the tailgate.

To close

Lower the boot lid using the handle

inside the boot 2 to assist you.

Electric controls

Please refer to the information on the

“Automatic tailgate” in Section 1.

Opening the doors manually

from the inside

If it is impossible to unlock the tailgate,

it can be done manually from inside:

– access the boot by tilting the rear

seat(s);

– unclip the lock access flap 3;

– slide the tab 5 to the right in vehicles

with a manual tailgate, or tab 4 on

vehicles with an automatic tailgate.

– push the boot lid to open it;

3.36

Refitting the luggage

compartment cover

Place the luggage cover into the hous-

ing points 3.

To remove the flexible

section of the luggage cover

Pull handle 1 gently to release the pins

from their mounting points located on

each side of the boot.

Guide the luggage cover onto the

roller 2.

Removing the luggage cover

Swivel the ends of the luggage cover 2

and remove it.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT COVER

Do not place any heavy or

solid objects on the luggage

cover. These may pose a

risk to the vehicle occu-

pants if the driver has to brake sud-

denly or if the vehicle is involved in

an accident.

Luggage compartment cover

storage

Vehicles without additional air con-

ditioning

Lift the false floor 4, remove the attach-

ment strips 5 and position the luggage

cover roller 2. Attach using the attach-

ment strips 5 under the false floor of the

boot 4.

Version with additional air condition-

ing

Remove the attachment strips 5 and

position the luggage cover roller 2.

Attach using the attachment strips 5.

3.37

BOOT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS

Bag hooks 1

Maximum weight per hook: 5 kg.

Storage compartment under

boot false floor

Depending on the vehicle, to access, lift

the false floor of the boot 5 using the

handle 2.

The false floor can be attached using

the hook 4 in the housing 3.

3.38

Always place the objects to be trans-

ported so that their largest side rests

against the back of the rear seat for

normal loads (e.g.: A), or against the

back of the front seats B when the rear

seatbacks are folded down.

If you have to place objects on the

folded seat back, it is vital that you

remove the headrests before folding

the seat back so that it can be folded as

flat as possible against the seat.

TRANSPORTING OBJECTS IN THE BOOT

Always position the heavi-

est items directly on the

floor. Use the lashing points

on the floor of the luggage

compartment, if these are fitted to

the vehicle. The luggage should be

loaded in such a way that no items

will be thrown forward and strike the

occupants if the driver has to brake

suddenly. Fasten the rear seat belts,

even if the seats are not occupied.

Anchorage points

Hooks 1 located on each corner of the

boot allow the load to be secured.

Always position objects being trans-

ported so that the heaviest items

are resting against the back of the

rear seat.

3.39

Permissible nose weight, maxi-

mum permissible towing weight,

braked and unbraked: refer to

the information on “Weights” in

Section 6.

Choice and fitting of towing

equipment

Maximum weight of towing equip-

ment: 32 kg

For fitting and conditions of use,

refer to the equipment’s fitting ins-

tructions.

Please keep these instructions with

the rest of the vehicle documenta-

tion.

TRANSPORTING OBJECTS towbar

A: 1027 mm.

If the towbar ball obscures the regis-

tration plate or the rear fog lights, it

should be removed when not in use.

In all cases, comply with local leg-

islation.

3.40

LUGGAGE NET (1/2)

– attach the two hooks 5 for the net

straps 3 to the anchoring points 4

– adjust the net strap 3 so that it is taut.

Fitting the luggage net

behind the front seats

Inside the vehicle on each side:

– lower cover 1 to gain access to the

anchoring points for the top part of

the luggage net;

– insert the top rod of net 2 into the an-

choring points;

Depending on the vehicle, this may be

used when transporting animals or lug-

gage to isolate them from the passen-

ger section.

It can be positioned:

– behind the rear seats A;

– behind the front seats B.

The luggage net is desig-

ned to retain a maximum

weight of 10 kg.

Risk of injury.

Do not install the luggage

net in this position when a

passenger is occupying a

rear seat

3.41

LUGGAGE NET (2/2)

– fix the net belt hook 11 onto the an-

choring points 10;

– adjust net strap 9 so that it is taut.

– adjust the position of the second row

seats: ensure that the seatbacks do

not touch the luggage net.

Note: Notch 8 should be on the side of

the centre seat belt feed.

Fitting the luggage net

behind the rear seats

(behind the second row rear seats on

the 7-seater version)

Inside the vehicle on each side:

– push the second row seats fully

forward;

– lift cover 6 to access the luggage net

upper mounting rail;

– insert upper rod 7 for the net into the

rail;

3.42

ROOF BARS

Access to the mounting

points

Open the doors to access the mounting

points 1.

For information on the range of

equipment adapted to your vehi-

cle, we advise you to consult an ap-

proved Dealer.

Refer to the fitting instructions for in-

formation on how to fit roof bars and

conditions of use.

Please keep these instructions with

the rest of the vehicle documenta-

tion.

Maximum permissible load on

roof rack: refer to the information

on “Weights” in Section 6.

If original roof bars, ap-

proved by our Technical

Department, are supplied

with screws, only use these

screws for attaching the roof bars to

the vehicle.

3.43

MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT (1/2)

Using the telephone

We remind you of the need

to conform to the legislation

in force concerning the use

of such equipment.

Hands-free telephone

integrated control

For equipped vehicles, use the steering

wheel controls 4.

Multimedia systems

1 Multimedia touchscreen display;

2 Central control;

3 Steering column controls;

4 Steering wheel controls;

5 Microphone.

Refer to the equipment instructions

for information on how to operate

this equipment.

3.44

Multimedia sockets 6

You can use sockets USB or the SD

card reader to access the multime-

dia content of your accessories and

the system update (please refer to the

equipment instructions).

The various sources can be selected

from the multifunction screen and from

the steering column controls.

MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT (2/2)

Multimedia sockets 7

Sockets USB can only recharge acces-

sories with a maximum power rating

of 12 Watts (voltage: 5V) per socket,

which have been approved by our

Technical Department.

The JACK socket enables the radio to

be used with an auxiliary cable.

The sockets USB can also recharge ac-

cessories with a maximum power rating

of 12 Watts (voltage: 5V) per socket,

which have been approved by our

Technical Department.

The JACK socket enables the radio to

be used with an auxiliary cable.

Connect accessories with a

maximum power of 12 watts

only.

Fire hazard.

4.1

Section 4: Maintenance

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2

Engine oil level: general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4

Engine oil level: topping up/filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6

Levels: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7

engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8

windscreen/headlight washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9

Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10

Tyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12

Bodywork maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14

Interior trim maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16

4.2

BONNET (1/2)

Unlocking the bonnet catch

To unlock, push tab 3 at the same time

as opening the bonnet.

Opening the bonnet

Lift the bonnet, guiding it up, and it

will rest in position with the help of two

struts 2.

To open, pull handle 1, located on the

left-hand side of the dashboard.

The engine may be hot

when carrying out opera-

tions in close proximity. In

addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

Do not press down on the

bonnet: there is a risk that

the bonnet may accidentally

close.

Before performing any

action in the engine com-

partment, the ignition must

be switched off by pressing

the engine stop button (please see

the information on “Starting, stop-

ping the engine” in Section 2).

When working in the engine

compartment, ensure that

the windscreen wiper stalk

is in the park position.

Risk of injury.

4.3

BONNET (2/2)

Closing the bonnet

Check that nothing has been left in the

engine compartment.

To close the bonnet again, hold the

bonnet in the middle and guide it down,

allowing a 30 cm gap before it is closed,

then release it. It will latch automatically

under its own weight.

Ensure that the bonnet is

properly locked.

Check that nothing is pre-

venting the catch from loc-

king (gravel, cloth, etc.).

After carrying out any work

in the engine compart-

ment, check that nothing

has been left behind (cloth,

tools, etc.).

These may damage the engine or

cause a fire.

In the event of even a slight

impact involving the radia-

tor grille or bonnet, have the

bonnet lock checked by an

authorised dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

4.4

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information

It is normal for an engine to use oil for

lubrication and cooling of moving parts

and it is normal to top up the level be-

tween oil changes.

However, contact your approved

Dealer if more than 0.5 litres is being

consumed every 600 miles (1,000 km)

after the running in period.

Oil change frequency: check the oil

level from time to time and certainly

before any long journey to avoid the

risk of damaging your engine.

Reading the oil level

The oil level should be read with the ve-

hicle on level ground, after the engine

has been switched off for some time.

The dipstick must be used to read

the exact oil level and make sure

that the maximum level has not been

exceeded (risk of engine damage).

Refer to the following pages.

The instrument panel display only

alerts the driver when the oil level is at

its minimum.

– remove the dipstick and wipe with a

clean, lint-free cloth;

– push the dipstick in as far as it will

go (for vehicles equipped with a cap-

type dipstick C, screw the cap in as

far as it will go);

– take out the dipstick again;

– read the level: it should never fall

below minimum mark A or exceed

maximum mark B.

Once the operation has been com-

pleted, ensure that the dipstick is

pushed in as far as it will go or that

the “cap-type dipstick” is completely

screwed in.

In order to prevent splashback, it is

recommended that a funnel be used

when topping up/filling with oil

Before performing any

action in the engine com-

partment, the ignition must

be switched off by pressing

the engine stop button (please see

the information on “Starting, stop-

ping the engine” in Section 2).

Exceeding the maximum

engine oil level

Under no circumstances

must the maximum fill

level B be exceeded: risk of damage

to the engine and catalytic con-

verter.

If the oil level exceeds the maximum

level, do not start your vehicle and

contact an approved Dealer.

4.5

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (1/2)

Topping up/Filling

The vehicle must be parked on level

ground and the engine should be cold

(for instance, before the engine is

started up for the first time in the day).

– Unscrew cap 1;

– top up the level (as a guide, the ca-

pacity between the minimum and

maximum reading on the dipstick 2

is between 1.5 and 2 litres, depend-

ing on the engine);

– wait for approximately 20 minutes to

allow the oil to flow into the engine;

– check the level using the dipstick 2

(as described above).

Once the operation has been com-

pleted, ensure that the dipstick is

pushed in as far as it will go or that

the “cap-type dipstick” is completely

screwed in.

Do not exceed the max level and

do not forget to refit cap 1 and dip-

stick 2.

Before performing any

action in the engine com-

partment, the ignition must

be switched off by pressing

the engine stop button (please see

the information on “Starting, stop-

ping the engine” in Section 2).

4.6

Engine oil grade

Refer to the Maintenance Service

Booklet for your vehicle.

Never run the engine in an

enclosed space as exhaust

gases are poisonous.

Engine oil change: if you

are changing the oil when

the engine is hot, be careful

not to scald yourself if the

oil overflows.

Filling: take care when

topping up the oil that

no oil drips onto engine

components - risk of fire.

Remember to refit the cap securely

as there is a risk of fire if oil splashes

onto hot engine components.

Consult your approved Dealer at

once if you notice an abnormal or

repeated drop in any of the fluid

levels.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (2/2)/OIL CHANGE

Exceeding the maximum

engine oil level

Under no circumstances

must the maximum fill level

be exceeded: risk of damage to the

engine and catalytic converter.

If the oil level exceeds the maximum

level, do not start your vehicle and

contact an approved Dealer.

Oil change

Service interval: refer to the

Maintenance Service Booklet for your

vehicle.

Oil change capacity

Please refer to the maintenance docu-

ment for your vehicle, or contact an au-

thorised dealer.

Always check the engine oil level using

the dipstick, as explained previously (it

should never fall below the minimum

level, or be over the maximum level on

the dipstick).

When working in the engine

compartment, ensure that

the windscreen wiper stalk

is in the park position.

Risk of injury.

The engine may be hot

when carrying out opera-

tions in close proximity. In

addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

4.7

Replacement intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Document for

your vehicle.

Checking intervals

Check the coolant level regularly

(very severe damage is likely to be

caused to the engine if it runs out of

coolant).

If the level needs to be topped up, only

use products approved by our Technical

Department which ensure:

– protection against freezing;

– anticorrosion protection of the cool-

ing system.

LEVELS (1/3)

Coolant

With the engine switched off and on

level ground, the level when cold must

be between the “MINI" and "MAXI"

marks on coolant reservoir 1.

Top this level up when cold before it

reaches the MIN mark.

No operations should be

carried out on the cooling

circuit when the engine is

hot.

Risk of burns.

Consult your approved dealer at

once if you notice an abnormal or

repeated drop in any of the fluid

levels.

The engine may be hot

when carrying out opera-

tions in close proximity. In

addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

Before performing any

action in the engine com-

partment, the ignition must

be switched off by pressing

the engine stop button (please see

the information on “Starting, stop-

ping the engine” in Section 2).

4.8

LEVELS (2/3)

Brake fluid level

This should be checked frequently, and

any time you notice even the slightest

loss in braking efficiency.

The level should be read with the engine

switched off and on level ground.

Level 2

It is normal for the level to drop as

the linings become worn, but it should

never drop below the “MINI” warning

line.

If you wish to check the disc and drum

wear yourself, you should obtain the

document explaining the checking pro-

cedure from our network or from the

manufacturer’s website.

Topping up

After any operation on the hydraulic cir-

cuit, a specialist must replace the fluid.

Only use fluids approved by our

Technical Department (and taken from

a sealed container).

Replacement intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Document for

your vehicle.

The engine may be hot

when carrying out opera-

tions in close proximity. In

addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

Before performing any

action in the engine com-

partment, the ignition must

be switched off by pressing

the engine stop button (please see

the information on “Starting, stop-

ping the engine” in Section 2).

4.9

LEVELS (3/3)/FILTERS

Windscreen/headlight washer

reservoir

Topping up

Open cap 3, fill until you can see the

fluid, then refit the cap.

Note: Regularly check the reservoir

level by topping up the liquid before

taking a trip.

Liquid

Windscreen washer fluid. In winter, use

anti-freeze product. Use products rec-

ommended by an authorised dealer.

Note: Do not use pure water (risk of

damage to the priming pump, limescale

building up on the pump and the jets).

NOTE

Depending on the vehicle, to find

out the fluid level, open cap 3 and

pull out the dipstick.

Filters

The replacement of filter elements (air

filter, passenger compartment filter,

diesel filter, etc.) is scheduled in the

maintenance operations for your vehi-

cle.

Replacement intervals for filter el-

ements: refer to the Maintenance

Document for your vehicle.

4.10

BATTERY (1/2)

The battery 1 does not require any

maintenance.

Handle the battery with care

as it contains sulphuric acid

which must not come into

contact with the eyes or

skin. If it does, wash the affected

area with plenty of cold water. If ne-

cessary, consult a doctor.

Ensure that naked flames, red hot

objects and sparks do not come into

contact with the battery as there is a

risk of explosion.

Depending on the vehicle, a system

continuously checks the battery charge

status. If this decreases, the message

“Battery low start engine” is displayed

on the instrument panel. In this case,

start the engine and the message on

the instrument panel will disappear.

The charge status of your battery can

decrease especially if you use your

vehicle:

– for short journeys;

– for driving in town;

– when the temperature drops;

– after extended use of energy-consu-

ming devices (radio, etc.) with the

engine switched off, the message

“Battery in safe mode” will be dis-

played on the instrument panel.

Power to these devices will be cut off

automatically.

The message will go off after about

two minutes.

Start the engine to reactivate the en-

ergy-consuming devices.

The engine may be hot

during operations in close

proximity. In addition, the

engine cooling fan may

start at any moment.

Risk of injury.

Before performing any

action in the engine com-

partment, the ignition must

be switched off by pressing

the engine stop button (please see

the information on “Starting, stop-

ping the engine” in Section 2).

4.11

Replacing the battery

As this operation is complex, we advise

you to contact an approved Dealer.

BATTERY (2/2)

The battery is a speci-

fic type, please ensure it

is replaced with the same

type. Consult an approved

dealer.

2 3 4

567

Label A

Observe the indications on the battery:

– 2 Naked flames and smoking are for-

bidden;

– 3 eye protection required;

– 4 keep away from children;

– 5 explosive materials;

– 6 refer to the handbook;

– 7 corrosive materials.

4.12

TYRE PRESSURE (1/2)

Label A

Open the door to read it.

Tyre pressures should be checked

when the tyres are cold.

If the tyre pressures cannot be checked

when the tyres are cold, increase the

pressures from 0.2 to 0.3 bar (or 3 PSI).

Never deflate a hot tyre.

Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure

monitoring system

In cases of under-inflation (puncture,

low pressure, etc.), warning light



lights up on the instrument panel.

Please refer to the information on the

“Tyre pressure monitoring system” in

Section 2.

Vehicle used fully laden (Maximum

Permissible All-up Weight) and

towing a trailer

the maximum speed must be limited to

60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pres-

sure increased by 0.2 bar.

Please refer to the information on

“Weights” in Section 6.

B: dimension of the tyres fitted to the

vehicle.

C: front tyre pressure.

D: rear tyre pressure.

E: emergency spare wheel dimensions.

F: tyre pressure for the emergency

spare wheel.

4.13

TYRE PRESSURES (2/2)

Tyre safety and use of snow chains:

Refer to the information on “Tyres” in

Section 5 for the servicing conditions

and, depending on the version, the use

of chains.

For your safety, please re-

spect the speed limit.

When they need to be re-

placed, only tyres of the

same make, size, type and profile

should be used on a single axle.

They must: either have a load ca-

pacity and speed rating at least

equal to those of the original

tyres, or conform to those recom-

mended by an authorised dealer.

Failure to heed these instructions

could endanger your safety and

affect your vehicle’s roadworthi-

ness.

Risk of loss of control of the ve-

hicle.

4.14

BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (1/2)

You should

Wash your car frequently, with the

engine off, with cleaning products rec-

ommended by the manufacturer (never

use abrasive products). Rinse thor-

oughly beforehand with a jet:

– spots of tree resin and industrial

grime;

– mud in the wheel arches and under-

neath the body which forms damp

patches;

– bird droppings, which cause a

chemical reaction with the paint that

rapidly discolours paintwork and

may even cause the paint to peel

off;

wash the vehicle immediately to

remove these marks since it is im-

possible to remove them by polish-

ing;

– salt, particularly in the wheel arches

and underneath the body after driv-

ing in areas where the roads have

been gritted.

Remove any plant matter (resin, leaves,

etc.) from the vehicle regularly.

What you should not do

Do not degrease or clean mechani-

cal components (e.g. the engine com-

partment), underneath the body, parts

with hinges (e.g. inside the doors) and

painted plastic external fittings (e.g.

bumpers) using high-pressure clean-

ing equipment or by spraying on prod-

ucts not approved by our Technical

Department. Doing this could give rise

to corrosion or operational faults.

Wash the vehicle in bright sunlight or

freezing temperatures.

Do not scrape off mud or dirt without

pre-wetting.

Allow dirt to accumulate on the exterior.

Allow rust to form following minor im-

pacts.

Do not use solvents not approved by

our Technical Department to remove

stains as this could damage the paint-

work.

Do not drive in snow or muddy condi-

tions without washing the vehicle, par-

ticularly under the wheel arches and

body.

A well-maintained vehicle will last

longer. It is therefore recommended to

maintain the exterior of the vehicle reg-

ularly.

Your vehicle has been treated with very

effective anti-corrosion products. It is

nevertheless subject to various outside

influences.

Corrosive agents in the atmosphere

– atmospheric pollution (built-up and

industrial areas),

– saline atmospheres (near the sea,

particularly in hot weather),

– seasonal and damp weather condi-

tions (e.g. road salt in winter, water

from road cleaners, etc.).

Minor impacts

Abrasive action

Dust and sand in the air, mud, road grit

thrown up by other vehicles, etc.

You should take a number of minor pre-

cautions in order to safeguard your ve-

hicle against such risks.

4.15

Respect local regulations about wash-

ing vehicles (e.g. do not wash your ve-

hicle on a public highway).

Observe the vehicle stopping distances

when driving on gravelled surfaces to

prevent paint damage.

Repair, or have repaired quickly, areas

where the paint has been damaged, to

prevent corrosion spreading.

Remember to visit the body shop pe-

riodically in order to maintain your

anti-corrosion warranty. Refer to the

Maintenance Document.

If it is necessary to clean mechani-

cal components, hinges, etc., spray

them with products approved by our

Technical Department to protect them

after they have been cleaned.

BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (2/2)

We have selected special products

to care for your vehicle and you can

obtain these from the manufactur-

er’s accessory outlets.

Using a roller type car wash

Return the windscreen wiper stalk to

the Park position (refer to the informa-

tion on the “Windscreen washer, wiper”

in Section 1). Check the mounting of

external accessories, additional lights

and mirrors, and ensure that the wiper

blades are secured with adhesive tape.

Remove the radio aerial mast if your

vehicle is fitted with this equipment.

Remember to remove the tape and refit

the antenna after washing.

Cleaning the headlights

As the headlights are made of plastic

“glass”, use a soft cloth or cotton wool

to clean them. If this does not clean

them properly, moisten the cloth with

soapy water, then wipe clean with a soft

damp cloth or cotton wool.

Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry

cloth.

Cleaning products containing alco-

hol must not be used.

Vehicles with a matte paint

finish

This type of paint requires certain pre-

cautions.

Do not do the following

– use wax-based products (polishing);

– rub hard;

– wash the vehicle in a roller-type car

wash;

– wash the vehicle using a high-pres-

sure device;

– attach stickers to the paintwork (risk

of leaving marks).

You should do the following

Wash the vehicle by hand using plenty

of water, using a soft cloth or a gentle

sponge.

4.16

Glass instrument panel

(e.g.: instrument panel, clock, exterior

temperature display, radio display, mul-

timedia or multifunction display etc.)

Use a soft cloth (or cotton wool).

If this does not clean them properly,

use a soft cloth (or cotton wool) slightly

moistened with soapy water and then

wipe clean with another soft damp cloth

or cotton wool.

Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry

cloth.

Do not use products containing alco-

hol and/or spray fluids on the area.

Seat belts

These must be kept clean.

Use products selected by our Technical

Department (Approved outlets) or

warm, soapy water and a sponge and

wipe with a dry cloth.

Detergents or dyes must not be used

under any circumstances.

INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (1/2)

Textiles (seats, door trim, etc)

Vacuum-clean the textiles regularly.

Liquid stain

Use soapy water.

Dab lightly (never rub) with a soft cloth,

rinse and remove the excess.

Solid or pasty stain

Carefully remove the excess solid or

pasty material immediately with a spa-

tula (working from the edges to the

centre to avoid spreading the stain).

Clean as for a liquid stain.

Special instructions for sweets or

chewing gum

Put an ice cube on the stain to solidify

it, then proceed as for a solid stain.

A well-maintained vehicle will last

longer. It is therefore recommended to

maintain the interior of the vehicle re-

gularly.

A stain should always be dealt with

swiftly.

Whatever type of stain is on the trim,

use cold (or warm) soapy water with

natural soap.

Detergents (washing-up liquid, pow-

dered products, alcohol-based pro-

ducts) should not be used.

Use a soft cloth.

Rinse and soak up the excess.

For further recommendations for

maintaining the interior, and/or for

any unsatisfactory results, please

see an authorised dealer.

4.17

You are strongly recom-

mended not to use high-

pressure or spray cleaning

equipment inside the pas-

senger compartment: use of such

equipment could impair the correct

functioning of the electrical or elec-

tronic components in the vehicle, or

have other detrimental effects.

INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (2/2)

You should not:

You are strongly advised not to po-

sition objects such as deodorants,

scents, etc. near air vents, as this could

damage your dashboard trim.

Removal/replacing removable

equipment originally fitted in

the vehicle

If you need to remove equipment in

order to clean the passenger com-

partment (for example, mats), always

ensure that they are correctly refitted

and are the right way around (the dri-

ver’s mat should be fitted on the driver’s

side, etc.) and fit them with the compo-

nents supplied with the equipment (for

example, the driver mat should always

be fixed using the pre-fitted mounting

components).

With the vehicle stationary, ensure that

nothing will impede driving (anything

obstructing the pedals, heel wedged by

the mat, etc.).

4.18

5.1

Section 5: Practical advice

Puncture/emergency spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2

Tyre inflation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8

Wheel trims - wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10

Tyres (tyre and wheel safety, use in winter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12

Front headlights (changing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15

Rear lights (changing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16

Indicator lights (changing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18

interior lighting:<UD-sous-titre> changing bulbs</UD-sous-titre> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23

RENAULT card: battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26

Wipers (replacing blades) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.29

Tow eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30

Operating faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.31

5.2

In case of puncture

Depending on the vehicle, a tyre infla-

tion kit or emergency spare wheel is

provided (refer to the following pages).

Special note

The Tyre Pressure Monitor function

does not check the emergency spare

wheel (the wheel replaced by the emer-

gency spare wheel disappears from the

instrument panel display).

Refer to the information on the “Tyre

pressure monitoring system” in

Section 2.

If the emergency spare wheel has been stored for several years, have it

checked by your Dealer to ensure that it is safe to use.

Vehicles fitted with an emergency spare wheel smaller than the

four other wheels:

– Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel to the same vehicle.

– As the punctured wheel is wider than the emergency spare wheel, the vehicle’s

ground clearance is reduced.

– Replace the emergency spare wheel as soon as possible with a wheel with the

same dimensions as the original.

– When this is fitted to the vehicle, which must only be a temporary measure, the

driving speed must not exceed the speed indicated on the label on the wheel.

– Fitting an emergency spare wheel may alter the way the vehicle usually runs.

Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration and reduce your speed when cor-

nering.

– If you need to use snow chains, fit the emergency spare wheel to the rear axle

and check the tyre pressure.

PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (1/3)

If the vehicle is parked on

the hard shoulder, you must

warn other road users of

your vehicle’s presence

with a warning triangle or with other

devices as per the legislation ap-

plying to the country you are in.

5.3

PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (2/3)

Emergency spare wheel

It is located under the vehicle.

From the boot:

– for vehicles fitted with a servo, uns-

crew the three mounting bolts 1

then move the servo 2 to access the

cover 3;

– lift cover 3;

– remove blanking cover;

– only use the wheel brace 4 (using

a different tool could damage the

mechanism) to unroll the retaining

cable, and the wheel falls to the

ground.

– from the exterior of the vehicle, stand

the wheel up and pass the cable and

the component 5 through the wheel

rim and release the wheel.

5.4

Reposition the blanking cover then the

cover 3.

For vehicles fitted with a servo, replace

the servo 2. Tighten the three screws 1.

PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (3/3)

As the punctured wheel is wider than the emergency spare wheel, when

you place the punctured wheel in the emergency spare wheel bay, the

vehicle’s ground clearance is reduced. To prevent damage, proceed ca-

refully when driving over raised sections of road and when dismounting

pavements When this is fitted to the vehicle, which must only be a temporary

measure, the driving speed must not exceed the speed indicated on the label

on the wheel. Replace the emergency spare wheel as soon as possible with a

wheel with the same dimensions as the original.

To refit a wheel

To carry out this operation, the cable

must be unwound.

Stand the wheel up with the valve to-

wards you. Thread the cable and the

component 5 through the wheel rim.

Rest the wheel with the valve 6 towards

the ground.

From the luggage compartment, tighten

the bolt fully in order to wind the retai-

ning cable, ensuring that the wheel re-

mains horizontal and the cable taut.

5.5

TYRE PRESSURE KIT (1/3)

The kit is only approved

for inflating the tyres of the

vehicle originally equipped

with the kit.

It must never be used to inflate

the tyres of another vehicle, or any

other inflatable object (rubber ring,

rubber boat, etc.).

Avoid spillage on skin when han-

dling the repair liquid bottle. If dro-

plets do leak out, rinse them off with

plenty of water.

Keep the repair kit away from chil-

dren.

Do not dispose of the empty bottle

in the countryside. Return it to your

approved dealer or to a recycling or-

ganisation.

The bottle has a limited service

life which is indicated on its label.

Check the expiry date.

Contact an approved dealer to re-

place the inflation tube and repair

product bottle.

The kit repairs tyres when

tread A has been da-

maged by objects smaller

than 4 mm. It cannot repair

all types of puncture, such as cuts

larger than 4 mm, or cuts in tyre si-

dewall B.

Ensure also that the wheel rim is in

good condition.

Do not pull out the foreign body cau-

sing the puncture if it is still in the

tyre.

Do not attempt to use the

inflation kit if the tyre has

been damaged as a result

of driving with a puncture.

You should therefore carefully check

the condition of the tyre sidewalls

before any operation.

Driving with underinflated, flat or

punctured tyres can be dangerous

and may make the tyre impossible

to repair.

This repair is temporary

A tyre which has been punctured

should always be inspected (and re-

paired, where possible) as soon as

possible by a specialist.

When taking a tyre which has been

repaired using this kit to be replaced,

you must inform the specialist.

When driving, vibration may be felt

due to the presence of the repair

product injected into the tyre.

5.6

TYRE PRESSURE KIT (2/3)

In the event of a puncture, use the kit si-

tuated under the second row rear pas-

senger footwell flap 1.

Before using the kit, park

the vehicle at a sufficient

distance from traffic, switch

on the hazard warning

lights, apply the parking brake, ask

all passengers to leave the vehicle

and keep them away from traffic.

– end piece 3 must be connected to a

vehicle accessories socket;

– press switch 5 to inflate the tyre to

the recommended pressure (please

refer to the information on “Tyre in-

flation pressure” in Section 4);

– after a maximum of 15 minutes, stop

inflating and read the pressure (on

pressure gauge 6).

Note: while the container is emp-

tying (approximately 30 seconds),

the pressure gauge 6 will briefly in-

dicate a pressure of up to 6 bar. The

pressure will then drop.

– adjust the pressure: to increase

it, continue inflation with the kit; to

reduce it, press button 7.

If the vehicle is parked on

the hard shoulder, you must

warn other road users of

your vehicle’s presence

with a warning triangle or with other

devices as per the legislation ap-

plying to the country you are in.

With the engine running and the par-

king brake applied,

– unroll the hose from the container;

– connect the compressor hose 4 to

the container’s inlet 9;

– depending on the vehicle, connect

the container 9 to the compressor

from the container recess 8;

– unscrew the valve cap on the rele-

vant wheel and screw on the contai-

ner’s inflation adapter 2;

5.7

TYRE PRESSURE KIT (3/3)

If a minimum pressure of 1.8 bar is

not reached after 15 minutes, repair

is not possible; do not drive the vehi-

cle but contact an approved dealer.

Once the tyre is correctly inflated,

remove the kit: slowly unscrew the in-

flation adapter 2 to prevent any repair

product from escaping and store the

container in plastic packaging to pre-

vent the product from escaping.

– Affix the driving recommendation

label to the dashboard where it can

easily be seen by the driver;

– Put the kit away.

– At the end of this initial inflation ope-

ration, air will still escape from the

tyre. You must drive a short distance

in order to seal the hole.

– Start immediately and drive at

between 12 and 40 mph (20 and

60 km/h) in order to distribute the

product evenly in the tyre and, after

driving for 2 miles (3 km), stop and

check the pressure.

– If the pressure is greater than 1.3 bar

but less than the recommended

pressure (refer to the label affixed to

the edge of the driver’s door), read-

just it. Otherwise, please contact an

authorised dealer: the tyre cannot be

repaired.

Precautions when using the

kit

The kit should not be operated for more

than 15 consecutive minutes.

Please be aware that a

poorly tightened or missing

valve cap can make the

tyres less airtight and may

lead to pressure loss.

Always use valve caps identical to

those fitted originally and tighten

them fully.

Following repair with the kit,

do not travel further than

120 miles (200 km). In addi-

tion, reduce your speed and

under no circumstances exceed

48 mph (80 km/h). The sticker,

which you must affix in a prominent

position on the dashboard, reminds

you of this.

Depending on the country or local

legislation, a tyre repaired with the

inflation kit may need to be replaced.

Nothing should be placed

around the driver’s feet

as such objects may slide

under the pedals during

sudden braking manoeuvres and

obstruct their use.

5.8

Jack 3

Fold it correctly before refitting it in its

housing (ensure that the wheelbrace is

correctly positioned 4).

Hubcap tool 5

This tool is used to remove the wheel

trims.

Tow eye 6

Refer to the information on “Towing” in

Section 5.

Screw guide 7

For tightening/loosening wheel bolts on

vehicles fitted with alloy wheels

The presence of the tools depends on

the vehicle.

Wheelbrace 2

Allows the wheel bolts to be locked/un-

locked (using end piece B).

Enables the emergency spare wheel

retaining cable to be wound/unwound

(using end piece A).

TOOLS (1/2)

Tool kit storage

The tool kit is located in flap 1 under the

feet of the right-hand second row pas-

senger.

To refit, reposition the tools in their

housing and fold the jack fully. Check

that the assembly is correctly posi-

tioned (to avoid noise).

5.9

TOOLS (2/2)/WHEEL TRIM

Wheel trim

Remove it using the hubcap tool 5 by

connecting the hook in the recess pro-

vided next to the valve 8 (to attach the

metal clip).

To refit the wheel trim, align it with

valve 8. Push the retaining hooks in

fully, starting with side A near the valve,

followed by B and C, finishing at D op-

posite the valve.

Note: if you are using anti-theft bolts,

refer to the information on “Changing a

wheel”.

Do not leave the tools un-

secured inside the vehicle

as they may come loose

under braking. After use,

check that all the tools are correctly

clipped into the tool kit, then posi-

tion it correctly in its housing: risk of

injury.

If wheel bolts are supplied in the

tool kit, only use these bolts for the

emergency spare wheel: refer to the

label affixed to the emergency spare

wheel.

The jack is designed for wheel

changing purposes only. Under no

circumstances should it be used for

carrying out repairs underneath the

vehicle or to gain access to the un-

derside of the vehicle.

5.10

CHANGING A WHEEL (1/2)

Vehicles equipped with a jack

and wheelbrace

If necessary, remove the wheel trim.

Use the wheelbrace 2 to slacken off the

wheel bolts. Position it so as to be able

to push from above.

Open the door nearest the wheel

concerned to identify the arrow 1 indi-

cating the jacking point 3.

Switch on the hazard war-

ning lights.

Keep the vehicle away from

traffic and on a level surface

where it will not slip.

Apply the parking brake and engage

a gear (first or reverse, or P for auto-

matic transmissions).

Ask all the passengers to leave the

vehicle and keep them away from

traffic.

If the vehicle is parked on

the hard shoulder, you must

warn other road users of

your vehicle’s presence

with a warning triangle or with other

devices as per the legislation ap-

plying to the country you are in.

If the vehicle is not equipped with a

jack or wheelbrace, you can obtain

these from your approved dealer.

Position the jack 4 horizontally. It is es-

sential to position the jack head in the

jacking point 3.

Close the door.

Start cranking the jack up by hand to

align the base plate (which should be

pushed slightly under the vehicle).

5.11

Turn the wheelbrace until the wheel lifts

off the ground.

Undo the bolts and take off the wheel.

Fit the emergency spare wheel onto

the hub and rotate it until the mounting

holes in the wheel coincide with those

of the hub.

If bolts are supplied with the emergency

spare wheel, only use these bolts for

the emergency spare wheel. Tighten

the bolts, checking that the wheel is

correctly positioned on its hub and uns-

crew the jack.

With the wheel on the ground, tighten

the bolts fully and have the tightness of

the bolts checked and the emergency

spare wheel pressure checked as soon

as possible.

Anti-theft bolt

If you use anti-theft bolts, fit these

nearest the valve (wheel embel-

lisher may not be able to fit).

If you have a puncture, re-

place the wheel as soon as

possible.

A tyre which has been

punctured should always be inspec-

ted (and repaired, where possible)

by a specialist.

CHANGING A WHEEL (2/2)

To prevent any risk of injury

or damage to the vehicle,

only crank the jack until the

wheel you are replacing is

a maximum of 3 centimetres off the

ground.

5.12

TYRES (1/3)

Maintaining the tyres

The tyres must be in good condition

and the tread form must have sufficient

depth; tyres approved by our Technical

Department have tread wear indica-

tors 1 which are indicators moulded

into the tread at several points.

The tyres are the only contact between

the vehicle and the road, so it is essen-

tial to keep them in good condition.

You must make sure that your tyres

conform to local road traffic regulations.

When the tread has worn down to the

wear warning strips, these strips will

become visible 2: it is then necessary

to replace your tyres because the tread

rubber is now only 1.6 mm deep at

most, resulting in poor road holding

on wet roads.

An overloaded vehicle, long journeys

by motorway, particularly in very hot

weather, or continual driving on poorly

surfaced minor roads will lead to more

rapid tyre wear and affect safety.

Incidents which occur when

driving, such as striking the

kerb, may damage the tyres

and wheel rims, and could

also lead to misalignment of the

front or rear axle geometry. In this

case, have the condition of these

checked by an approved dealer.

For your safety, please re-

spect the speed limit.

When they need to be re-

placed, only tyres of the

same make, size, type and profile

should be used on a single axle.

They must: either have a load ca-

pacity and a speed capacity at

least equal to the original tyres,

or correspond to those recom-

mended by your authorised

dealer.

Failure to heed these instructions

could endanger your safety and

affect your vehicle’s roadworthi-

ness.

Risk of loss of control of the ve-

hicle.

5.13

TYRES (2/3)

Tyre pressures

Adhere to the tyre pressures (including

the emergency spare wheel). The tyre

pressures should be checked at least

once a month and additionally before

any long journey (refer to the label af-

fixed to the edge of the driver’s door).

The pressures should be checked cold:

ignore higher pressures which may be

reached in hot weather or following a

high speed journey.

If the tyre pressures cannot be checked

when the tyres are cold, increase the

pressures from 0.2 to 0.3 bar (or 3 PSI).

Never deflate a hot tyre.

Special note

Depending on the vehicle, there may

be an adapter which needs to be posi-

tioned on the valve before air is added.

Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure

monitoring system

In cases of under-inflation (puncture,

low pressure, etc.), warning light



lights up on the instrument panel.

Please refer to the information on the

“Tyre pressure monitoring system” in

Section 2.

Emergency spare wheel

Refer to the information on “Puncture”

and “Changing a wheel” in Section 5.

Incorrect tyre pressures

lead to abnormal tyre wear

and unusually hot running.

These are factors which

may seriously affect safety and lead

to:

– poor road holding,

– risk of bursting or tread separa-

tion.

The pressure depends on the load

and the speed of use. Adjust the

pressure according to the condi-

tions of use (refer to the label affixed

to the edge of the driver’s door).

Please be aware that a

poorly tightened or miss-

ing valve cap can make the

tyres less airtight and lead

to pressure loss.

Always use valve caps identical to

those fitted originally and tighten

them fully.

5.14

TYRES (3/3)

For safety reasons, this op-

eration must be carried out

by a specialist.

Fitting different tyres may

change your vehicle as follows:

– it may mean that your vehicle no

longer conforms to current regu-

lations;

– it may change the way it handles

when cornering;

– it may cause the steering to be

heavy;

– It may affect the use of snow

chains.

Use in winter

Chains

For safety reasons, fitting snow

chains to the rear axle is strictly for-

bidden.

Chains cannot be fitted to tyres which

are larger than those originally fitted to

the vehicle.

Snow or Winter tyres

We would recommend that these be

fitted to all four wheels to ensure that

your vehicle retains maximum adhe-

sion.

Warning: These tyres sometimes have

a specific direction of rotation and a

maximum speed index which may be

lower than the maximum speed of your

vehicle.

Snow chains may only be

fitted to tyres of the same

size as those originally

fitted to your vehicle.

In all cases, we would recommend

that you contact an authorised

dealer who will be able to advise you

on the choice of equipment which is

most suitable for your vehicle.

Changing a wheel

As the tyre pressure moni-

tor may take several min-

utes to correctly determine

the positions of the wheels and the

pressure values after driving, check

the tyre pressures following any op-

eration.

Studded tyres

This type of equipment may only be

used for a limited period and as laid

down by local legislation. It is neces-

sary to observe the speed specified by

current legislation.

These tyres must, at a minimum, be

fitted to the two front wheels.

19” wheels and larger

cannot be fitted with

chains.

If you wish to use special

equipment, please consult an au-

thorised dealer.

Fitting new tyres

5.15

Main beam headlights 2

Please consult an authorised dealer.

Dipped beam headlights 3

Please consult an authorised dealer.

Direction indicators

You can replace this bulb. However, we

would advise you to have it replaced by

an authorised dealer if it proves difficult.

Access bulb holder 4 via the under-

neath of the vehicle, then unscrew it to

unclip. Replace the bulb.

Bulb type: PY21W.

Cleaning the headlights

Use a soft cloth. If this does not clean

it properly, moisten the cloth with soapy

water then rinse off.

Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry

cloth.

Cleaning products containing alco-

hol must not be used.

FRONT HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when

replaced.

Risk of injury.

The engine may be hot

when carrying out opera-

tions in close proximity. In

addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

Daytime running lights and

side lights 1

Please consult an authorised dealer.

To comply with current legislation,

or as a precaution, you can obtain

an emergency kit from an approved

dealer containing a set of spare

bulbs and fuses.

5.16

From the outside of the vehicle, pull on

the light unit to remove it then unscrew

bulb holder 3 a quarter of a turn.

Replace the bulb.

Bulb type: W5W.

Refitting

To refit, proceed in the reverse order,

taking care not to damage the wiring.

REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: changing bulbs (1/3)

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when

replaced.

Risk of injury.

Side lights, brake lights and

direction indicators

Consult an approved Dealer.

Reversing lights

From the boot, unclip the cover on the

interior trim of the boot lid.

Using a screwdriver, unscrew bolt 2 to

remove the light, then change the bulb.

5.17

Fog light

Access bulb holder 4 via the under-

neath of the vehicle, then unscrew it by

turning towards the centre of the vehi-

cle.

Bulb type: P21W.

REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: changing bulbs (2/3)

High level brake light 5

Consult an approved Dealer.

5.18

REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: changing bulbs (3/3)

Side indicator lights 8

Consult an approved Dealer.

Number plate lights 6

Unclip light 6 by pressing the tab 7.

Remove the light cover to gain access

to the bulb.

Bulb type: C5W festoon bulb.

5.19

Front and rear door lights 2

Unclip door light (using a flat-blade

screwdriver or similar) 2.

Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn

and take out the bulb.

Bulb type: W5W.

INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (1/2)

Map reading lights 1

Please consult an authorised dealer.

5.20

The bulbs are under pres-

sure and can break when

replaced.

Risk of injury.

INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (2/2)

Ambient lighting

Please consult an authorised dealer.

5 6 7

Passenger storage drawer

light 4

Unclip light 4 by pressing the tabs on

each side (using a flat-blade screw-

driver or similar).

Disconnect the light.

Press tab 5 to release the lens 7 and

access bulb 6.

Bulb type: W5W.

Boot lights 3

Unclip light 3 by pressing the tabs on

each side (using a flat-blade screw-

driver or similar).

Disconnect the light.

Press tab 5 to release the lens 7 and

access the bulb 6.

Bulb type: W5W.

5.21

FUSES (1/2)

Fuse box

If any electrical component does not

work, check the condition of the fuses.

Unclip the access flap A.

Tweezers 1

Remove the fuse using tweezers 1, lo-

cated underneath the fuses.

To remove the fuse from the tweezers,

slide the fuse to the side.

It is not advisable to use the free fuse

locations.

Check the fuse in question

and replace it, if neces-

sary, by a fuse of the same

rating.

If a fuse is fitted where the rating is

too high, it may cause the electrical

circuit to overheat (risk of fire) in the

event of an item of equipment using

an excessive amount of current.

In accordance with local legislation

or as a precautionary measure:

obtain an emergency kit containing

a set of spare bulbs and fuses from

an approved Dealer.

Use the fuse allocation label in storage

compartment A to identify the fuses.

Certain fuses should only be replaced

by a qualified professional. These fuses

are not listed on the label.

Only change the fuses represented on

the label.

5.22

FUSES (2/2)

Allocation of fuses

(the presence of certain fuses depends on the vehicle equipment level)

Symbol Allocation Symbol Allocation

Windscreen washer



Not used

Third row accessories socket, boot accessories

socket

Towbar socket

Front cigarette lighter, front and rear second row

accessories socket



Diagnostic socket, audio alarm



Not used

Horn



Heated door mirrors



Instrument panel, dashboard control lighting

Brake lights, passenger compartment central unit



Piloted dampened suspension



Parking brake

Front windscreen wiper



Additional servo

Direction indicator lights, hazard warning lights

Radio, multifunction screen, multimedia acces-

sories sockets, parking brake control



Rear USB sockets on console



Passenger compartment centre unit, rear wiper,

rear fog light



Not used

Locking opening elements, tailgate opening and

closing control

5.23

BATTERY: troubleshooting (1/2)

To avoid all risk of sparks:

– Ensure that any consumers (cour-

tesy lights, etc.) are switched off

before disconnecting or reconnect-

ing the battery;

– when charging, stop the charger

before connecting or disconnecting

the battery;

– to avoid creating a short circuit be-

tween the terminals, do not place

metal objects on the battery;

– always wait at least one minute after

the engine has been switched off

before disconnecting a battery;

– make sure that you reconnect the

battery terminals after refitting.

Connecting a battery charger

The battery charger must be com-

patible with a battery with nominal

voltage of 12 volts.

Do not disconnect the battery when the

engine is running. Follow the instruc-

tions given by the manufacturer of

the battery charger you are using.

Special procedures may be

required to charge some

batteries. Contact your au-

thorised dealer.

Avoid all risk of sparks which may

cause an immediate explosion, and

charge the battery in a well-venti-

lated area. Risk of serious injury.

Handle the battery with care

as it contains sulphuric acid,

which must not come into

contact with eyes or skin. If

it does, wash the affected area with

plenty of cold water. If necessary,

consult a doctor.

Ensure that naked flames, red hot

objects and sparks do not come into

contact with the battery as there is a

risk of explosion. There is a risk of

explosion.

The engine may be hot when car-

rying out operations in close prox-

imity. In addition, the engine cooling

fan can come on at any moment.

Risk of injury.

Before performing any

action in the engine com-

partment, the ignition must

be switched off by pressing

the engine stop button (please see

the information on “Starting, stop-

ping the engine” in Section 2).

5.24

Starting the vehicle using the

battery from another vehicle

If you have to use the battery from an-

other vehicle to start, obtain suitable

jump leads (with a large cross section)

from an approved dealer or, if you al-

ready have jump leads, ensure that

they are in perfect condition.

The two batteries must have an iden-

tical nominal voltage of 12 volts. The

battery supplying the current should

have a capacity (amp-hours, Ah) which

is at least the same as that of the dis-

charged battery.

Ensure that there is no risk of contact

between the two vehicles (risk of short

circuiting when the positive terminals

are connected) and that the discharged

battery is properly connected. Switch

off your vehicle ignition.

Start the engine of the vehicle supply-

ing the current and run it at a moderate

speed.

BATTERY: troubleshooting (2/2)

Lift the red cover on box 1 located

behind the battery.

Connect the positive cable A to sup-

port 3 (+) located under the box

cover 1, then to terminal 5 (+) of the

battery supplying the current.

Connect the negative cable B to ter-

minal 4 (–) of the battery supplying the

current, then to the metal cable 2 (–).

Start the engine, and as soon as it starts

running, disconnect cables A and B in

reverse order ( 2 - 4 - 5 - 3).

Check that there is no con-

tact between leads A and B

and that the positive lead A

is not touching any metal

parts on the vehicle supplying the

current.

Risk of injury and/or damage to the

vehicle.

5.25

Operating faults

If the battery is too weak to ensure cor-

rect operation, you can start and lock/

unlock the vehicle (please refer to the

information on “Locking/unlocking the

opening elements” in Section 1).

RENAULT CARD: battery

Replacing the battery

When the message “Keycard battery

low” appears on the instrument panel,

replace the battery in the RENAULT

card:

– slide the rear casing 1 downwards

while pressing on zone A;

– remove the battery cover 2;

– remove the battery by pressing on

one side and lifting the other;

– replace it according to the direc-

tion and template shown inside the

cover.

Do not throw away your

used batteries; give them to

an organisation responsible

for collecting and recycling

batteries.

When refitting, proceed in the reverse

order, then press one of the buttons on

the card four times, close to the vehicle:

the message will disappear.

Note: it is not advisable to touch the

electronic circuit or contacts on the

RENAULT card when replacing the bat-

tery.

The batteries are available from ap-

proved Dealers, and their service

life approximately two years. Check

that there is no dye on the battery:

risk of an incorrect electrical contact.

5.26

ACCESSORIES

Electrical and electronic accessories

Before installing this type of accessory (particularly for transmitters/receivers: frequency bandwidth, power level, po-

sition of the aerial, etc.), make sure it is compatible with your vehicle. You can get advice from an authorised dealer.

Connect accessories with a maximum power of 120 watts only. Fire hazard.

No work may be carried out on the vehicle’s electrical or radio circuits, except by authorised dealers: an incorrectly connected

system may result in damage being caused to the electrical equipment and/or the components connected to it.

If the vehicle is fitted with any aftermarket electrical equipment, make sure that the installation is correctly protected by a fuse.

Establish the rating and position of this fuse.

Use of transmission/receiving devices (telephones, CB equipment etc.).

Telephones and CB equipment with integrated aerials may cause interference to the electronic systems originally fitted to the

vehicle: it is advisable only to use equipment with an external aerial. Furthermore, we remind you of the need to conform

to the legislation in force concerning the use of such equipment.

Fitting after-market accessories

If you wish to install accessories on the vehicle: please contact an authorised dealer. Also, to ensure the correct operation of

your vehicle, and to avoid any risk to your safety, we recommend that you use only accessories specifically designed for your

vehicle, which are the only accessories for which the manufacturer will provide a warranty.

If you are using an anti-theft device, only attach it to the brake pedal.

Obstructions to the driver

On the driver’s side, only use mats suitable for the vehicle, attached with the pre-fitted components, and check the fitting regu-

larly. Do not lay one mat on top of another. There is a risk of wedging the pedals

5.27

WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES: replacement (1/2)

Windscreen wiper blades 1

With the ignition on and the engine

switched off, lower the windscreen

wiper stalk fully: the blades stop slightly

away from the bonnet.

Lift wiper arm 3, press button 2 to re-

lease the blade.

Refitting

Slide the blade along the arm until

it clips on. Check that it is correctly

locked in place. Lower the windscreen

wiper arm carefully.

With the ignition on, return the wind-

screen wiper stalk to the stop position.

The blade on the driver’s side must

always be above the passenger blade.

If this is not the case, a quick sweep of

the windscreen wipers should be per-

formed once the vehicle is travelling at

over 4 mph (7 km/h).

Note: Before restarting your vehicle,

lower the windscreen wiper blades

onto the windscreen to avoid any risk

of damaging the bonnet or the wipers.

– In frosty weather, make

sure that the wiper blades

are not stuck by ice (to

avoid the risk of the motor

overheating or damaging the

blades).

– Check the condition of the wiper

blades.

Replace the wiper blades as soon

as they begin to lose efficiency

(approximately once a year).

Whilst changing the blade, take care

not to drop the arm onto the window

after it has been removed as this

may break the window.

5.28

WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES: replacement (2/2)

Keep monitoring the condition of the

wiper blades.

– clean the blades, windscreen and

rear screen regularly with soapy

water;

– do not use them when the wind-

screen or rear screen are dry;

– free them from the windscreen or

rear screen when they have not

been used for a long time.

To refit

To refit the wiper blade, proceed in re-

verse order to removal. Make sure that

the blade is correctly locked in position.

Rear screen wiper blade 4

Stalk in stop position (deactivated):

– Lift the wiper arm 6;

– pivot wiper blade 4 until some resist-

ance is met (movement B);

– depending on the vehicle, press

tab 5, then remove the wiper blade

by pulling it (movement A).

Before changing the rear

wiper blade, make sure the

stalk is in the stop position

(deactivated).

Risk of injury.

5.29

TOWING: breakdown (1/2)

Before towing, put the gearbox in neu-

tral, unlock the steering column and re-

lease the parking brake.

For vehicles fitted with an automatic

gearbox, if it is not possible to put the

gear lever into position N, please con-

sult an authorised dealer.

Steering column unlocking

Press the engine starter button for ap-

proximately two seconds, without de-

pressing the pedals.

The column is unlocked, the acces-

sory functions are supplied: the vehi-

cle lights can be used (indicators, brake

lights etc.). Always switch on the lights

when driving at night.

Once you have finished towing, press

the engine start button twice (risk of

running down the battery).

The speed specified by current legis-

lation for towing must always be ob-

served. If your vehicle is the towing

vehicle, do not exceed the maximum

towing weight for your vehicle (refer to

the information on “Weights” in

Section 6).

Towing a vehicle with an

automatic gearbox

Transport the vehicle on a trailer or tow

it with the front wheels off the ground.

In exceptional circumstances, you

may tow it with all four wheels on the

ground, only in a forward gear, with the

gear in neutral position N over a maxi-

mum distance of 50 miles and not ex-

ceeding a speed of 15 mph (25 km/h).

5.30

TOWING : breakdown (2/2)

Only use the front 1 and rear 4towing

points (never use the driveshafts or any

other part of the vehicle). These towing

points may only be used for towing:

never use them for lifting the vehicle di-

rectly or indirectly.

Access to towing points

Front towing point

Press zone A and keep depressed

while pulling zone B to open flap 2.

Rear towing point

Press zone C then release to open

flap 5.

Tighten the tow eye 3 fully: as much

as possible by hand at first, then finish

tightening it using the wheelbrace.

When the engine is

stopped, steering and brak-

ing assistance are not op-

erational.

Do not leave the tools unse-

cured inside the vehicle as

they may come loose under

braking.

Use only towing hitch 3 and the wheel-

brace or the lever located under the

2nd row right rear passenger footwell

(please refer to the information on the

“Tool kit” in Section 5).

– Use a rigid towing bar.

If a rope or cable is used

(where the law allows this),

the vehicle being towed

must be able to brake.

– A vehicle must not be towed if it is

not fit to be driven.

– Avoid accelerating or braking

suddenly when towing, as this

may result in damage being

caused to the vehicle.

– When towing a vehicle, it is ad-

visable not to exceed 30 mph

(50 km/h).

5.31

OPERATING FAULTS (1/6)

Using the RENAULT card POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

The RENAULT card does not lock or

unlock the doors.

Card battery is flat. Replace the battery. You can still lock/

unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the

information on “Locking/unlocking the

doors” in Section 1 and “Starting/Stopping

the engine” in Section 2).

Use of appliances operating on the

same frequency as the card (mobile

phone, etc.).

Stop using the equipment or use the in-

tegrated key (refer to the information on

“Locking, unlocking the opening elements”

in Section 1).

Vehicle located in a high electromag-

netic radiation zone.

Vehicle battery flat.

Use the key integrated in the card (refer to

the information on “Locking, unlocking the

opening elements” in Section 1).

The message “Place card close to

START button” appears on the instru-

ment panel.

Hold the start button card close until the

instrument panel message stops being dis-

played, then press the same button within

2 seconds of the message going out.

5.32

OPERATING FAULTS (2/6)

The starter is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

The instrument panel indicator lights

are weak or fail to light up and the

starter does not turn.

Battery terminals not tight, bat-

tery terminals disconnected or

oxidised.

Retighten or reconnect the terminals, or clean them

if they are oxidised.

Discharged battery or not opera-

tional.

Connect another battery to the faulty battery. Refer

to the paragraph “Battery: troubleshooting” in sec-

tion 5 or replace the battery if necessary.

Do not push the vehicle if the steering column is

locked.

Faulty circuit. Consult an approved dealer.

The engine will not start. Starting conditions are not ful-

filled.

Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping

the engine” in Section 2.

The RENAULT “hands-free” card

does not work.

Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping

the engine” in Section 2.

The engine cannot be switched off. Card not detected. Press and hold the start button.

Electronic fault. Press the start button quickly five times.

The steering column remains locked. Steering wheel locked. Move the steering wheel while pressing the engine

start button (please refer to Section 2 “Starting, stop-

ping the engine”).

Faulty circuit. Consult an approved dealer.

5.33

OPERATING FAULTS (3/6)

On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

Vibrations. Tyres not inflated to correct pres-

sures, incorrectly balanced or dam-

aged.

Check the tyre pressures: if this is not the

problem, have them checked by an ap-

proved Dealer.

White smoke from the exhaust. In the diesel version, this is not neces-

sarily a fault. Smoke may be caused

by particle filter regeneration.

Please refer to the information on “Special

features of diesel versions” in Section 2.

Smoke under the bonnet. Short-circuit or cooling system leak. Stop, switch off the ignition, stand away

from the vehicle and contact an approved

dealer.

The oil pressure warning light comes

on:

while cornering or braking The level is too low. Top up the engine oil level (refer to the in-

formation on “Engine oil level: topping up/

filling” in Section 4).

is slow to go out or remains lit

under acceleration

Loss of oil pressure. Stop the vehicle and contact an approved

Dealer.

5.34

OPERATING FAULTS (4/6)

On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

Steering becomes heavy. Assistance overheating. Consult an approved dealer.

The engine is overheating. The cool-

ant temperature indicator is in the

warning zone and warning light

® comes on.

Engine cooling fan not working. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and

contact an approved dealer.

Coolant leaks. Check the coolant reservoir: it should con-

tain fluid. If there is no coolant, consult an

authorised dealer as soon as possible.

Coolant boiling in the coolant reser-

voir.

Mechanical fault: damaged cylinder

head gasket.

Stop the engine.

Contact an approved dealer.

Radiator: If there is a significant lack of coolant, remember that it must never be topped up using cold coolant while

the engine is very warm. After any procedure on the vehicle which has involved even partial draining of the cooling

system, it must be refilled with a new mixture prepared in the correct proportions. Reminder: only products approved

by our Technical Department may be used for this purpose.

5.35

OPERATING FAULTS (5/6)

Electrical equipment POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

The wipers do not work. Wiper blades stuck. Free the blades before using the wipers.

Faulty electrical circuit. Consult an approved dealer.

Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse, refer to the information

on “Fuses”.

The wiper does not stop. Faulty electrical controls. Consult an approved dealer.

Direction indicators flashing more

quickly.

Blown bulb. See information on “Headlights: changing

bulbs” in section 5.

The direction indicators do not work. Faulty electrical circuit or control. Consult an approved dealer.

Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse, refer to the information

on “Fuses”.

The lights do not come on or go off. Faulty electrical circuit or control. Consult an approved dealer.

Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse, refer to the information

on “Fuses”.

5.36

OPERATING FAULTS (6/6)

Electrical equipment POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

Traces of condensation in the lights. Traces of condensation may be a nat-

ural phenomenon caused by varia-

tions in temperature.

In this case, the traces will disappear

slowly once the lights are switched

on.

The front seat belt reminder light

comes on when the seat belts are

fastened.

An object is stuck between the floor

and the seat and is disrupting the op-

eration of the sensor.

Remove all objects from underneath the

front seats.

6.1

Section 6: Technical specifications

Vehicle identification plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2

Engine identification plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6

Towing weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6

Replacement parts and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7

Service sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8

Anticorrosion check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14

6.2

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATES

The information shown on the ve-

hicle identification plate should be

quoted on all correspondence or

orders.

The presence and location of the in-

formation depends on the vehicle.

Vehicle identification plate A

1 Manufacturer name.

2 EC design number or approval

number.

3 Identification number.

Depending on the vehicle, this

information is also given on

marking B.

4 MMAC (Maximum permissible

all-up weight).

5 MTR (Gross train weight: vehicle

fully loaded, with trailer).

6 MMTA (Maximum Permissible

Weight) front axle.

7 MMTA rear axle.

8 Reserved for related or additional

entries.

9 Diesel exhaust emissions.

10 Paint reference (colour code).

6.3

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION PLATES

Please quote the information on the

engine plate or label A in all corre-

spondence or orders.

(Location varies depending on engine)

1 Engine type.

2 Engine suffix.

3 Engine number.

1 2

6.4

DIMENSIONS (in meters)

1,034 2,884 0,939 1,624 to 1,634

4,857

1,677*

1,615 to 1,625

2,128

* Unladen

6.5

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

Versions 1.6 Tce 1.6 dCi

Engine type

(see engine plate)

M5M Turbo R9M

Cubic capacity (cc) 1 618 1 598

Type of fuel

Octane rating

It is essential that you use unleaded petrol of the

octane rating stated on the label inside the fuel

filler flap.

If not available, for a limited time only, use un-

leaded fuel:

– with an octane rating of 91 for a label showing

95 or 98;

– with an octane rating of 87 for a label showing

91, 95 or 98.

Diesel

The label located in the fuel filler flap

indicates authorised fuels.

Spark plugs Only use the spark plugs specified for your vehi-

cle’s engine.

The type should be marked on a label affixed

inside the engine compartment. If it is not then

contact an approved Dealer.

Fitting spark plugs which are not to specification

may damage the engine.

–

6.6

WEIGHTS (in kg)

The weights indicated are for a basic vehicle without options: they may vary depending on your vehicle’s equipment.

Consult an approved Dealer.

Maximum Permissible All-Up Weight (MMAC)

Gross Train Weight (MTR)

Maximum permissible all-up weight (MMTA)

Weights are indicated on the vehicle identification plate (refer

to the information on “Vehicle identification plates” in Section 6)

Braked Trailer Weight* found by calculating: MTR - MMAC

Unbraked Trailer Weight* 750

Permissible nose weight* 80

Permissible load on the roof with the carrying device 80 kg (including the carrying device)

* Towing weight (towing a caravan, boat, etc.)

Towing is prohibited when the MTR - MMAC calculation is equal to zero, or when the MTR is equal to zero (or is not listed) on the

identification plate.

– It is important to comply with the towing weights, governed by local legislation in each country and, in particular, laid down in

the Road Traffic Regulations. Contact an approved Dealer about any towing equipment.

– When towing, under no circumstances may the total train weight (vehicle + trailer) be exceeded. However the following is

permitted:

– rear axle MMTA exceeded by no more than 15%,

– maximum MMAC exceeded by no more than 10% or 100 kg (whichever is reached first).

In either case, the maximum speed of the towing assembly must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure must be

increased by 0.2 bar (3 PSI).

– The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude. You need to reduce the total train weight by 10% at an al-

titude of 1,000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1,000 metres thereafter.

6.7

Original parts are based on strict specifications and are subject to highly-specialised tests. Therefore, they are of at least the same

level of quality as the parts fitted originally.

If you always fit genuine replacement parts to your vehicle, you will ensure that it performs well. Furthermore, repairs carried out

within the manufacturer’s Network using original parts are guaranteed according to the conditions set out on the reverse of the

repair order.

REPLACEMENT PARTS AND REPAIRS

6.8

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

VIN: ..................................................................................

SERVICE SHEETS (1/6)

6.9

SERVICE SHEETS (2/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

6.10

SERVICE SHEETS (3/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

6.11

SERVICE SHEETS (4/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

6.12

SERVICE SHEETS (5/6)

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

6.13

VIN: ..................................................................................

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous

Type of operation: Stamp

Service □

....................................... □

Anti-corrosion check:

OK □ Not OK* □

*See specific page

SERVICE SHEETS (6/6)

6.14

ANTICORROSION CHECK (1/5)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried

out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

6.15

ANTICORROSION CHECK (2/5)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried

out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

6.16

ANTICORROSION CHECK (3/5)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried

out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

6.17

ANTICORROSION CHECK (4/5)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried

out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

6.18

ANTICORROSION CHECK (5/5)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ..........................................................

Corrosion repair operation to be carried

out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

Repair to be carried out:

Stamp

Date of repair:

7.1

ALPHABETICAL INDEX (1/5)

ABS .......................................................................2.26 → 2.37

accessories........................................................................ 5.26

accessories socket ................................................... 3.28, 3.44

adaptive cruise control...........................................2.56 → 2.62

additional air conditioning ....................................... 3.12 – 3.13

additional methods of restraint .....................1.32 → 1.35, 1.38

side protection ............................................................. 1.37

to the rear seat belts ........................................1.32 → 1.36

adjusting your driving position ........................................... 1.28

advice on antipollution ....................................................... 2.21

air bag....................................................................1.32 → 1.38

activating the front passenger air bags ........................ 1.61

deactivating the front passenger air bags .................... 1.59

air conditioning ........................................................3.7 → 3.14

air vents .....................................................................3.4 → 3.6

anti-corrosion check ..............................................6.14 → 6.18

anti-corrosion protection .................................................... 4.14

anti-lock braking system: ABS ...............................2.26 → 2.37

antipollution

advice .......................................................................... 2.21

armrest:

front .............................................................................. 3.25

ashtray ............................................................................... 3.28

assisted parking...............................2.63 → 2.66, 2.69 → 2.72

automatic gearbox (use) ........................................2.74 → 2.79

automatic gearbox selector lever...........................2.74 → 2.79

battery..................................................................... 4.10 – 4.11

troubleshooting ................................................. 5.23 – 5.24

blind spot warning signal .......................................2.41 → 2.43

blind spot: warning signal ......................................2.41 → 2.43

bonnet......................................................................... 4.2 – 4.3

brake fluid ............................................................................ 4.8

bulbs

changing ..........................................................5.15 → 5.18

catalytic converter................................................... 2.10 – 2.11

central door locking ........................................1.8 → 1.10, 1.14

changing a bulb .....................................................5.15 → 5.18

changing a wheel.................................................... 5.10 – 5.11

changing gear ...............................................2.12, 2.74 → 2.79

child restraint/seat .............................1.39 – 1.40, 1.42 → 1.58

child safety.........1.2, 1.5, 1.13, 1.39 – 1.40, 1.42 → 1.58, 3.15

child seats..........................................1.39 – 1.40, 1.42 → 1.58

children .......................................................... 1.39 – 1.40, 1.40

children (safety) .......................................... 1.2, 1.5, 1.13, 3.15

cigar lighter ........................................................................ 3.28

cleaning:

inside the vehicle .............................................. 4.16 – 4.17

clock .................................................................................. 1.85

closing the doors .....................................................1.8 → 1.13

control instruments ................................................. 1.74 – 1.75

controls ................................................................... 1.62 – 1.63

coolant ................................................................................. 4.7

courtesy light ...................................... 3.20 – 3.21, 5.19 – 5.20

courtesy mirrors ................................................................. 3.22

cruise control ...................................2.46 → 2.48, 2.52 → 2.55

cruise control-speed limiter..............2.46 → 2.48, 2.52 → 2.55

customised vehicle settings .............................................. 1.84

customising the vehicle settings ....................................... 1.84

dashboard............................................................... 1.62 – 1.63

daytime running lights........................................................ 1.93

dimensions .......................................................................... 6.4

display ..........................................................1.64 → 1.73, 3.43

doors......................................................................1.11 → 1.14

driver assistance....................................................2.26 → 2.72

7.2

ALPHABETICAL INDEX (2/5)

driver’s position .....................................................1.62 → 1.69

driving ......2.2 → 2.5, 2.10 → 2.20, 2.23 → 2.37, 2.46 → 2.48,

2.52 → 2.66, 2.74 → 2.79

driving aids ............................................................2.26 → 2.72

driving position

settings ........................................................................ 1.28

driving recommendations ......................................2.16 → 2.20

ECO driving ...........................................................2.16 → 2.20

ECO mode ......................................................................... 2.18

electric beam height adjustment ........................................ 1.95

electric windows ..................................................... 3.15 – 3.16

electronic parking brake ........................................2.13 → 2.15

electronic stability control: ESC .............................2.26 → 2.37

emergency active braking.................................................. 2.31

emergency brake assist.........................................2.26 → 2.37

emergency braking ................................................2.26 → 2.37

emergency key ........................................................... 1.2 – 1.3

emergency spare wheel ............................................5.2 → 5.4

engine

technical specifications .................................................. 6.5

engine oil ...................................................................4.4 → 4.6

engine oil level ............................................................ 4.5 – 4.6

engine specifications ........................................................... 6.5

engine start/stop button .............................................2.3 → 2.5

environment ....................................................................... 2.22

ESC: electronic stability control .............................2.26 → 2.37

external temperature ......................................................... 1.85

faults

operating faults ................................................5.31 → 5.36

filter

air filter ........................................................................... 4.9

diesel filter ...................................................................... 4.9

oil filter ........................................................................... 4.9

passenger compartment filter ........................................ 4.9

fittings ....................................................................3.23 → 3.27

fixed sunroof ...................................................................... 3.19

front passenger air bag deactivation ................................. 1.59

front seat

driver’s position memory .............................................. 1.27

front seat adjustment .............................................. 1.21 – 1.22

front seats

adjustment ........................................................ 1.21 – 1.22

with electric controls ......................................... 1.23 – 1.24

with manual controls .................................................... 1.21

fuel

advice on fuel economy ...................................2.16 → 2.20

capacity ...................................................................... 1.104

consumption ....................................................2.16 → 2.20

filling .............................................................1.104 → 1.106

grade ............................................................1.104 → 1.106

fuel consumption ...................................................2.16 → 2.20

fuel economy .........................................................2.16 → 2.20

fuel level ............................................................................ 1.70

fuel repriming ................................................................... 1.105

fuel tank

capacity ........................................................1.104 → 1.106

fuel tank capacity ...............................................1.104 → 1.106

fuses ....................................................................... 5.21 – 5.22

gear lever........................................................................... 2.12

grab handle........................................................................ 3.25

grip control .........................................................................

2.30

handbrake.......................................................................... 2.13

hands-free telephone integrated control ................. 3.43 – 3.44

hazard warning lights signal ................................... 1.90 – 1.91

7.3

ALPHABETICAL INDEX (3/5)

head-up display .....................................................1.70 → 1.73

headlight flashers .............................................................. 1.90

headlight washer ............................................................. 1.100

headrest............................................................................. 3.29

heating and air conditioning system ....................... 3.13 – 3.14

heating system ........................................................3.7 → 3.11

Hill Start Assist..............................................2.26 → 2.37, 2.35

horn ................................................................................... 1.90

horn:

flash ............................................................................. 1.90

sounding the horn ........................................................ 1.90

hubcap tool ................................................................. 5.8 – 5.9

indicators .................................................................. 1.90, 5.15

indicators:

direction indicators .............................................. 1.90, 5.16

exterior temperature indicator ...................................... 1.85

instrument panel ..............................................1.64 → 1.75

instrument panel ...........................................1.64 → 1.83, 1.91

instrument panel messages...................................1.76 → 1.83

interior trim

maintenance ..................................................... 4.16 – 4.17

Isofix ......................................................................1.53 → 1.58

jack ............................................................................. 5.8 – 5.9

lane departure warning ..........................................2.38 → 2.40

levels:

brake fluid ...................................................................... 4.8

coolant ........................................................................... 4.7

engine oil ....................................................................... 4.4

windscreen washer reservoir ......................................... 4.9

lifting the vehicle

changing a wheel .............................................. 5.10 – 5.11

lighting:

exterior ......................................................1.3, 1.91 → 1.95

instrument panel .......................................................... 1.91

interior ........................................... 3.20 – 3.21, 5.19 – 5.20

lights

changing bulbs ............................................................. 5.15

front .............................................................................. 5.15

lights:

brake lights .................................................................. 5.16

dipped beam headlights ...................................... 1.91, 5.15

direction indicators ................................... 1.90, 5.15 – 5.16

fog lights ............................................................. 1.95, 5.16

hazard warning ............................................................ 1.90

main beam headlights .............................. 1.92 – 1.93, 5.15

number plate lights ...................................................... 5.18

reversing lights ............................................................. 5.16

side lights ............................................................ 1.91, 5.16

locking the doors ................................. 1.2 → 1.7, 1.11 → 1.14

luggage compartment cover .............................................. 3.36

luggage retaining net .............................................. 3.40 – 3.41

maintenance ...................................................................... 2.21

maintenance:

bodywork .......................................................... 4.14 – 4.15

interior trim ........................................................ 4.16 – 4.17

mechanical .........................................4.2 – 4.3, 6.8 → 6.13

map reading lights .................................................. 3.20 – 3.21

menu for customising the vehicle settings ......................... 1.84

methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...1.36 → 1.38

mulitfunction display ..............................................1.70 → 1.73

multifunction screen...............................................1.70 → 1.73

multimedia (equipment) .......................................... 3.43 – 3.44

multimedia equipment ............................................ 3.43 – 3.44

7.4

ALPHABETICAL INDEX (4/5)

Multi-Sense................................................................. 3.2 – 3.3

navigation ............................................................... 3.43 – 3.44

navigation system ................................................... 3.43 – 3.44

oil change ..................................................................... 4.4, 4.6

opening the doors ....................................................1.8 → 1.13

operating faults ......................................................5.31 → 5.36

overspeed warning .......................................1.70, 2.49 → 2.51

paintwork

maintenance ..................................................... 4.14 – 4.15

parking assistance: assisted parking 2.63 → 2.66, 2.69 → 2.72

parking distance control.........................................2.63 → 2.66

power-assisted steering..................................................... 1.86

powered tailgate ....................................................1.15 → 1.19

puncture................................................. 5.2 → 5.4, 5.8 → 5.11

radio........................................................................ 3.43 – 3.44

rear drive wheels ..........................................2.26 → 2.37, 2.37

rear parcel shelf ........................................................ 3.27, 3.36

rear screen de-icing/demisting .......................................... 3.11

rear seats

functions ..........................................................3.30 → 3.34

rear view camera .................................................... 2.67 – 2.68

rear view mirrors ....................................................1.87 → 1.89

RENAULT ANTI-INTRUDER DEVICE (RAID) ................... 1.14

RENAULT card

battery .......................................................................... 5.25

use .......................................................................1.2 → 1.7

RENAULT card battery ...................................................... 5.25

replacement parts ................................................................ 6.7

reverse gear

selecting ..................................................2.12, 2.74 → 2.79

reversing sensor ....................................................2.63 → 2.66

roof bars ............................................................................ 3.42

roof rack

roof bars ....................................................................... 3.42

running in ............................................................................. 2.2

safety distance warning .......................................... 2.44 – 2.45

safety distances ...................................................... 2.44 – 2.45

screen

fold-away screen .......................................................... 1.72

navigation display .................................. 1.71, 3.43 – 3.44

navigation screen ..................................... 1.71, 3.43 – 3.44

screen wash/wipe ............................................... 1.102 – 1.103

seat belt pretensioners ..........................................1.32 → 1.35

seat belts ................................1.28 → 1.30, 1.32 → 1.35, 1.38

see-me-home lighting ........................................................ 1.94

service sheets..........................................................6.8 → 6.13

shock absorbers ................................................................ 2.73

side indicator lights

changing bulbs ............................................................. 5.18

sign detection: overspeed warning ........................2.49 → 2.51

signals and lights ...................................................1.91 → 1.95

special features of diesel versions..................................... 2.11

special features of petrol vehicles ..................................... 2.10

speed limiter ..........................................................2.46 → 2.48

starting the engine .....................................................2.3 → 2.5

steering wheel

adjustment ................................................................... 1.86

Stop & Start ...............................................................2.6 → 2.9

Stop & Start function..................................................2.6 → 2.9

storage compartment.............................................3.23 → 3.27

storage compartments ..................................3.23 →

3.27, 3.37

sun blinds .......................................................................... 3.22

7.5

ALPHABETICAL INDEX (5/5)

sun visor ............................................................................ 3.22

sunroof...................................................................3.17 → 3.19

suspension ........................................................................ 2.73

suspension with controlled damping.................................. 2.73

switching on the vehicle ignition .......................................... 2.4

tailgate ......................................1.15 → 1.19, 3.35, 3.37 – 3.38

tanks and reservoirs

brake fluid ...................................................................... 4.8

coolant ........................................................................... 4.7

tanks and reservoirs:

windscreen washer ........................................................ 4.9

technical specifications ..............................................6.4 → 6.7

telephone ................................................................ 3.43 – 3.44

temperature regulation ............................................3.7 → 3.11

tool kit ......................................................................... 5.8 – 5.9

towing

driving .......................................................................... 2.35

breakdown ........................................................ 5.29 – 5.30

towing equipment .............................................. 3.38 – 3.39

towing a caravan ............................................. 3.38 – 3.39, 6.6

towing equipment

fitting ................................................................. 3.38 – 3.39

towing hitch............................................................. 5.29 – 5.30

towing rings .............................................................. 3.38, 3.41

towing weights ..................................................................... 6.6

traction control .......................................................2.26 → 2.37

trailer driving assistance .................................................... 2.35

trailer driving: assistance ................................................... 2.35

trailer: driving assistance ................................................... 2.35

transporting children ..........................1.39 – 1.40, 1.42 → 1.58

transporting objects

in the luggage compartment ........................................ 3.38

luggage net ....................................................... 3.40 – 3.41

trims ..................................................................................... 5.9

trip computer and warning system...1.64 → 1.69, 1.74 → 1.83

tyre inflation kit...........................................................5.5 → 5.7

tyre pressure.............................2.23 → 2.25, 4.12 – 4.13, 5.13

tyre pressure monitor.............................................2.23 → 2.25

tyre pressures ...........................2.23 → 2.25, 4.12 – 4.13, 4.13

tyres ....................2.20, 2.23 → 2.25, 4.12 – 4.13, 5.12 → 5.14

unlocking the doors .................................................1.8 → 1.10

ventilation .......................................................3.7 → 3.13, 3.13

warning buzzer ................................................ 1.11, 1.90, 1.93

warning lights...................................1.64 → 1.69, 1.74 → 1.83

washing .................................................................. 4.14 – 4.15

weights ................................................................................ 6.6

wheelbrace ................................................................. 5.8 – 5.9

wheels (safety) ......................................................5.12 → 5.14

windscreen de-icing/demisting .......................................... 3.11

windscreen washer ...................................... 1.102 – 1.103, 4.9

wiper blades ........................................................... 5.27 – 5.28

wipers

blades ............................................................... 5.27 – 5.28

RENAULT S.A.S. SOCIÉTÉ PAR ACTIONS SIMPLIFIÉE AU CAPITAL DE 533 941 113 € / 13-15, QUAI LE GALLO

92100 BOULOGNE-BILLANCOURT R.C.S. NANTERRE 780 129 987 — SIRET 780 129 987 03591 / TÉL. : 0810 40 50 60

NU 1130-2 – 99 91 097 35R – 02/2015 – Edition anglaise

à999109735Rïëíä

(

www.myrenault.com

)

E-Guide

de voorruitspiegel komt los, na herhaaldelijk lijmen. Is er een alternatieve oplossing ? Gesteld op 15-1-2025 om 15:57
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
Mijn glazen dak gaat dicht en gelijk weer open zodra die tegen de spoiler aan komt. ! Wie weet een oplossing? Gesteld op 7-7-2023 om 07:37
Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

lees eerst de handleiding door;
controleer of uw vraag al eerder door iemand anders is gesteld;
probeer uw vraag zo duidelijk mogelijk te stellen;
heeft u een probleem en al geprobeerd om dit op te lossen, vermeld dit erbij aub;
heeft u een oplossing gekregen van een bezoeker dan horen wij dat graag in dit forum;
wilt u een reactie geven op een vraag of antwoord, gebruik dan niet dit formulier maar klik op de knop 'reageer op deze vraag';
uw vraag wordt direct op de website gezet; vermijd daarom persoonlijke gegevens in te vullen;

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Renault Espace - 2015 bij:

nieuwe vragen en antwoorden
nieuwe handleidingen

U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Renault Espace - 2015 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 7,32 mb groot.

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Renault Espace - 2015

Renault Espace - 2015 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 316 pagina's

Renault Espace - 2015 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 316 pagina's

Renault Espace - 2015 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 316 pagina's

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.

Renault Espace - 2015 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Renault Espace - 2015

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info

Renault Espace - 2015 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Renault Espace - 2015

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info